Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Introduction
4
Instrument Cluster
10
Warning and control lights
Gauges
10
15
Entertainment Systems
20
AM/FM stereo cassette with CD
AM/FM stereo with CD
AM/FM stereo
AM/FM stereo cassette
CD changer
20
24
27
29
31
Climate Controls
35
Manual heating and air conditioning
Electronic automatic temperature control
Rear window defroster
35
36
38
Lights
39
Headlamps
Turn signal control
Bulb replacement
39
41
43
Driver Controls
49
Windshield wiper/washer control
Steering wheel adjustment
Power windows
Mirrors
Speed control
49
50
60
61
63
71
Message center
Locks and Security
77
Keys
Locks
Anti-theft system
77
77
85
1
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Maintenance and Specifications
210
Engine compartment
Engine oil
Battery
Fuel information
Air filter(s)
Part numbers
Refill capacities
Lubricant specifications
212
213
217
225
239
240
241
242
Accessories
Index
248
250
All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical
including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval
system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written
authorization from Ford Motor Company. Ford may change the contents without
notice and without incurring obligation.
Copyright © 2004 Ford Motor Company
3
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Introduction
CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known
to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
CONGRATULATIONS
Congratulations on acquiring your new Ford. Please take the time to get
well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook. The more
you know and understand about your vehicle, the greater the safety and
pleasure you will derive from driving it.
For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the
following website:
• In the United States: www.ford.com
• In Canada: www.ford.ca
• In Australia: www.ford.com.au
• In Mexico: www.ford.com.mx
Additional owner information is given in separate publications.
This Owner’s Guide describes every option and model variant available
and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your
particular vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles it may describe
options before they are generally available.
Remember to pass on this Owner’s Guide when reselling the vehicle. It
is an integral part of the vehicle.
Fuel pump shut-off switch: In the event of an accident the
safety switch will automatically cut off the fuel supply to the
engine. The switch can also be activated through sudden vibration (e.g.
collision when parking). To reset the switch, refer to the Fuel pump
shut-off switch in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
4
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION
Warning symbols in this guide
How can you reduce the risk of personal injury to yourself or others? In
this guide, answers to such questions are contained in comments
highlighted by the warning triangle symbol. These comments should be
read and observed.
Warning symbols on your vehicle
When you see this symbol, it is
imperative that you consult the
relevant section of this guide before
touching or attempting adjustment
of any kind.
Protecting the environment
We must all play our part in
protecting the environment. Correct
vehicle usage and the authorized
disposal of waste, cleaning and
lubrication materials are significant
steps towards this aim. Information in this respect is highlighted in this
guide with the tree symbol.
BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle does not need an extensive break-in. Try not to drive
continuously at the same speed for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of
new vehicle operation. Vary your speed frequently in order to give the
moving parts a chance to break in.
Drive your new vehicle at least 500 miles (800 km) before towing a
trailer.
Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break-in oils during
the first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation, since these
additives may prevent piston ring seating. See Engine oil in the
Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information on oil
usage.
5
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
SPECIAL NOTICES
Emission warranty
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty includes Bumper-to-Bumper
Coverage, Safety Restraint Coverage, Corrosion Coverage, and 6.0L
Power Stroke Diesel Engine Coverage. In addition, your vehicle is eligible
for Emissions Defect and Emissions Performance Warranties. For a
detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered, refer to
the Warranty Guide that is provided to you along with your Owner’s
Guide.
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and
storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentially
includes information about the performance or status of various systems
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Ford
Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair facilities may
access vehicle diagnostic information through a direct connection to your
vehicle when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Event Data Recording
Other modules in your vehicle — event data recorders — are capable of
collecting and storing data during a crash or near crash event. The
recorded information may assist in the investigation of such an event.
The modules may record information about both the vehicle and the
occupants, potentially including information such as:
• how various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• whether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts were buckled;
• how far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or the
brake pedal;
• how fast the vehicle was traveling; and
• where the driver was positioning the steering wheel.
To access this information, special equipment must be directly connected
to the recording modules. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do
not access event data recorder information without obtaining consent,
unless pursuant to court order or where required by law enforcement,
other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful
authority. Other parties may seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada.
6
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Special instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic
controls.
Please read the section Supplemental restraint system (SRS)
in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter. Failure to follow
the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal injury.
Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats should
NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger air bag.
Notice to owners of natural gas fueled vehicles
Before you drive your vehicle, be sure to read the Dedicated Natural
Gas Vehicle supplement. This book contains important operation and
maintenance information.
Notice to owners of Severe Duty vehicles
Before you drive your vehicle, be sure to read the Severe Duty Owner’s
Guide supplement. This book contains important operation and
maintenance information.
MIDDLE EAST/NORTH AFRICA VEHICLE SPECIFIC INFORMATION
For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with
features and options that are different from the ones that are described
in this Owner’s Guide; therefore, a supplement has been supplied that
complements this book. By referring to the pages in the provided
supplement, you can properly identify those features, recommendations
and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. Refer to this
Owner’s Guide for all other required information and warnings.
7
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Safety Alert
See Owner’s Guide
Air Bag-Front
Child Seat
Fasten Safety Belt
Air Bag-Side
Child Seat Installation
Warning
Child Seat Lower
Anchor
Child Seat Tether
Anchor
Brake System
Brake Fluid -
Non-Petroleum Based
Anti-Lock Brake System
Powertrain Malfunction
Master Lighting Switch
Fog Lamps-Front
Speed Control
Hazard Warning Flasher
Fuse Compartment
Windshield Wash/Wipe
Fuel Pump Reset
Windshield
Rear Window
Defrost/Demist
Defrost/Demist
8
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Power Window Lockout
Interior Luggage
Power Windows
Front/Rear
Child Safety Door
Lock/Unlock
Compartment Release
Symbol
Panic Alarm
Engine Oil
Engine Coolant
Temperature
Engine Coolant
Do Not Open When Hot
Battery
Avoid Smoking, Flames,
or Sparks
Battery Acid
Fan Warning
Explosive Gas
MAX
MIN
Maintain Correct Fluid
Level
Power Steering Fluid
Emission System
Engine Air Filter
Jack
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter
Check fuel cap
Low tire warning
9
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
Instrument Cluster
WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES
Standard instrument cluster
Optional instrument cluster
Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may
become serious enough to cause expensive repairs. A warning light may
illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle’s functions.
Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the
bulb works. If any light remains on after starting the vehicle, have the
respective system inspected immediately.
Check engine: The Check engine
indicator light illuminates when the
CHECK
ENGINE
ignition is first turned to the ON
position to check the bulb. Solid
illumination after the engine is
started indicates the On Board Diagnostics System (OBD-II) has
detected a malfunction. Refer to On board diagnostics (OBD-II) in the
10
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
Maintenance and Specifications chapter. If the light is blinking, engine
misfire is occurring which could damage your catalytic converter. Drive
in a moderate fashion (avoid heavy acceleration and deceleration) and
have your vehicle serviced immediately.
Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust temperatures
could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel system, interior
floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly causing a fire.
Electronic throttle control:
Illuminates when the engine has
defaulted to a ’limp-home’ operation.
Report the fault to a dealer at the
earliest opportunity.
Check fuel cap: Illuminates when
CHECK
the fuel cap may not be properly
FUEL
installed. Continued driving with
this light on may cause the Check
engine warning light to come on.
CAP
Refer to Fuel filler cap in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter.
Brake system warning light:
• Standard instrument cluster
BRAKE
! P
• Optional instrument cluster
To confirm the brake system
warning light is functional, it will
momentarily illuminate when the
ignition is turned to the ON position when the engine is not running, or
in a position between ON and START, or by applying the parking brake
when the ignition is turned to the ON position. If the brake system
warning light does not illuminate at this time, seek service immediately
from your dealership. Illumination after releasing the parking brake
indicates low brake fluid level and the brake system should be inspected
immediately by your servicing dealership.
11
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning light on is
dangerous. A significant decrease in braking performance may
occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle. Have the vehicle
checked by your dealer immediately.
Anti-lock brake system: If the
ABS light stays illuminated or
ABS
continues to flash, a malfunction has
been detected, have the system
serviced immediately. Normal
braking is still functional unless the brake warning light also is
illuminated.
Air bag readiness: If this light fails
AIR
BAG
to illuminate when ignition is turned
to ON, continues to flash or remains
on, have the system serviced
immediately. A chime will also sound when a malfunction in the
supplemental restraint system has been detected.
Safety belt: Reminds you to fasten
your safety belt. A chime will also
sound to remind you to fasten your
safety belt, refer to the Seating and
Safety Restraints chapter.
Charging system: Illuminates when
the battery is not charging properly.
Engine oil pressure (if
equipped): Illuminates when the oil
pressure falls below the normal
range. Check the oil level and add
oil if needed. Refer to Engine oil in the Maintenance and
Specifications chapter.
Engine coolant temperature:
Illuminates when the engine coolant
temperature is high. Stop the
vehicle as soon as possible, switch off the engine and let cool. Refer to
Engine coolant in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
12
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is
running or hot.
Traction control AdvanceTrac
active (if equipped): Illuminates
when the Traction control system
is active. It will be lit for a minimum
of four seconds or for the duration
of the Traction Control event,
refer to the Driving chapter for more information.
Air suspension (if equipped):
• Standard instrument cluster
AIR
SUSP
• Optional instrument cluster
CHECK AIR SUSPENSION
OVERDRIVE OFF
DOOR
AJAR
Illuminates when the air suspension
is turned OFF, the load limit is
exceeded or the air suspension
system requires servicing.
LOW
km
MILES
/GAL
WASHER
FLUID
TRUNK AJAR
LTR/100 km
Low fuel (if equipped):
Illuminates when the fuel level in
the fuel tank is at or near empty
(refer to Fuel gauge in this chapter
for more information).
LOW
FUEL
O/D off:
• Standard instrument cluster
O/D
OFF
• Optional instrument cluster
CHECK AIR SUSPENSION
OVERDRIVE OFF
DOOR
AJAR
Illuminates when the overdrive
function of the transmission has
been turned OFF using the
LOW
km
MILES
/GAL
WASHER
FLUID
transmission control switch (TCS),
refer to the Driving chapter. If the
light flashes steadily, have the
system serviced immediately.
TRUNK AJAR
LTR/100 km
13
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
Turn signal: Illuminates when the
left or right turn signal or the
hazard lights are turned on. If the
indicators stay on or flash faster, check for a burned out bulb.
High beams: Illuminates when the
high beam headlamps are turned on.
MESSAGE CENTER INDICATOR LIGHTS (IF EQUIPPED)
Speed control: Illuminates when
SPEED CONTROL
the speed control is activated. Turns
off when the speed control system
is deactivated.
Door ajar: Illuminates when one of
the doors is not completely shut and
the ignition is turned to ON. With
the ignition ON, this light will flash
six times (if a door is open). With
the ignition in RUN position, a tone
will sound for one second (if a door
is open).
CHECK AIR SUSPENSION
OVERDRIVE OFF
DOOR
AJAR
LOW
km
MILES
/GAL
WASHER
FLUID
TRUNK AJAR
LTR/100 km
Low washer fluid: Momentarily
illuminates when the ignition is
turned to ON and will stay on when
the windshield washer fluid is low.
CHECK AIR SUSPENSION
OVERDRIVE OFF
DOOR
AJAR
LOW
km
MILES
/GAL
WASHER
FLUID
TRUNK AJAR
LTR/100 km
Trunk ajar: If the trunk is not
completely closed, this light comes
on when you turn the ignition to
ON. With the ignition ON, this light
will flash five times and sound a
tone for one second, then the light
remains on (if the trunk is open).
CHECK AIR SUSPENSION
OVERDRIVE OFF
DOOR
AJAR
LOW
km
MILES
/GAL
WASHER
FLUID
TRUNK AJAR
LTR/100 km
Headlamps on warning chime: Sounds when the headlamps or parking
lamps are on, the ignition is off (the key is not in the ignition) and the
driver’s door is opened.
14
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
Key-in-ignition warning chime: Sounds when the key is left in the
ignition in the OFF/LOCK or ACCESSORY position and the driver’s door
is opened.
GAUGES
Standard instrument cluster gauges
Optional instrument cluster gauges
15
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
Speedometer: Indicates the current vehicle speed.
• Standard instrument cluster
70
120
60
80
140 90
50
100
80
40
60
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
160100
30
20
10
40
20
180
11 0
0
0
0
0
200
120
MPH
km/h
• Optional instrument cluster
S
km
km/h
MPH
Engine coolant temperature gauge:
• Standard instrument cluster
H
TEMP
C
16
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
• Optional instrument cluster
Indicates engine coolant
H
temperature. At normal operating
temperature, the needle will be in
the normal range (between “H” and
“C”). If it enters the red section, the
engine is overheating. Stop the
vehicle as soon as safely possible,
switch off the engine and let the
engine cool, refer to What you
should know about fail-safe
N
O
R
M
C
cooling in the Maintenance and specifications chapter.
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is
running or hot.
Odometer: Registers the total miles (kilometers) of the vehicle.
• Standard instrument cluster
70
120
60
80
140 90
50
100
80
40
60
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
160100
30
20
10
40
20
180
11 0
0
0
0
0
200
120
MPH
km/h
• Optional instrument cluster
S
km
Refer to Electronic Message Center
in the Driver Controls chapter on
how to switch the display from
Metric to English.
km/h
MPH
17
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
Trip odometer: Registers the miles (kilometers) of individual journeys.
• Standard instrument cluster
70
120
60
To reset, depress the control.
80
140 90
50
100
80
40
60
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
160100
30
20
10
40
20
180
11 0
0
0
0
0
200
120
MPH
km/h
• Optional instrument cluster
S
km
Refer to Electronic Message Center
in the Driver Controls chapter for
Trip A and Trip B features.
km/h
MPH
Battery voltage gauge (if
equipped): Indicates the battery
voltage when the ignition is in the
ON position. If the pointer moves
and stays outside the normal
H
VOLTS
operating range (as indicated by
arrows), have the vehicle’s electrical
system checked as soon as possible.
L
18
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
Engine oil pressure gauge (if
equipped): Indicates engine oil
pressure. The needle should stay in
the normal operating range
H
(between “L” and “H”). If the needle
falls below the normal range, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and
check the engine oil level. Add oil if
needed. If the oil level is correct,
have your vehicle checked at your
dealership or by a qualified
OIL
L
technician.
Fuel gauge: Indicates approximately how much fuel is left in the fuel
tank (when the ignition is in the ON position). The fuel gauge may vary
slightly when the vehicle is in motion or on a grade.
• Standard instrument cluster
F
FUEL
E
• Optional instrument cluster
A minimum of four gallons must be
F
added or removed from the fuel
tank in order for the gauge to
instantaneously update. If less than
four gallons is added, the gauge will
take between five and ten minutes
to update.
1
/
2
Refer to Filling the tank in the
Maintenance and Specifications
chapter for more information.
E
19
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
Entertainment Systems
PREMIUM AM/FM STEREO/CASSETTE/SINGLE CD (IF EQUIPPED)
16
18 19
1
17
2
3
15
MUTE
14
13
AM/FM
CD
TAPE
BASS
BAL
TREB
FADE
TUNE
SCAN
4
5
RDS
SEL
REW
1
FF
2
SIDE
3
COMP
5
SHUF
6
AUTO
SET
SEEK
4
7
6
9
12
11
10
8
1. Eject: Press to eject a tape.
2. Eject: Press to eject a CD.
3. Bass: Allows you to increase or
decrease the audio system’s bass
output. Press BASS then press SEL
to decrease or increase the bass levels.
Treble: Allows you to increase or
decrease the audio system’s treble
output. Press TREB then press SEL
to decrease
or increase
the treble levels.
4. Balance: Allows you to shift
speaker sound between the right
and left speakers. Press BAL then
press SEL to shift sound to the left
or right
.
20
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
Fade: Allows you to shift speaker
sound between the front and rear
speakers. Press FADE then press
SEL to shift the sound to the rear
or the front
.
5. COMP (Compression): In CD
mode, press to bring soft and loud
passages together for a more
consistent listening level.
SHUF (Shuffle): Press to play CD
tracks in random order.
6. Select: Use to adjust bass, treble,
balance and fade levels.
7. Side 1–2: Press to change sides
on the tape.
Dolby:
Dolby noise
reduction: Reduces tape noise and
hiss; press to activate/deactivate.
The Dolby noise reduction system is manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby and the double-D
symbol are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation.
8. REW (Rewind): Works in tape
and CD modes.
In tape mode, radio play continues
until rewind is stopped (with the TAPE control) or the beginning of the
tape is reached.
In CD mode, REW control reverses the CD within the current track.
FF (fast forward): Works in tape
and CD modes.
In the tape mode, tape direction
automatically reverses when the end of the tape is reached.
In CD mode, FF advances the CD within the current track.
21
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
9. RDS: (Radio Data System):
Allows you to access FM stations
which are RDS- equipped. Press
RDS then SEL to select from:
Traffic — Allows you to receive traffic announcements and control their
volume level. Traffic information is not available in most U.S.
markets.
Show — Allows you to view the frequency and program type of the
chosen radio station.
The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio
and Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) recommend that FM radio
broadcasters use RDS technology to transmit information. FM radio
stations are independently operated and individually elect to use RDS
technology to transmit station ID and program type as desired.
Setting the clock: Press RDS until SELECT HOUR or SELECT MINS is
displayed. Press SEL to increase (
) or decrease (
).
10. Autoset: Press to set first six
strong stations into AM, FM1 or
FM2 memory buttons; press again to
return to normal stations.
11. Scan: Works in radio, tape and
CD modes. Press SCAN for a brief
sampling of radio stations, tape
selections or CD tracks.
12. Seek: Works in radio, tape and
CD modes. Press to access the
previous
or next
listenable
radio station, tape selection or CD track.
13. Tune: Works in radio mode.
Press to manually advance up or
down the frequency band.
22
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
14. AM/FM/CD: Press AM/FM to
select a radio frequency. Press while
in tape or CD mode to return to
radio mode. Press CD to enter CD mode and to play a CD already in the
system.
15. Mute mode: Press to mute the
playing media.
16. Power/volume: Press to turn
the system on/off. Turn to
raise/lower the volume.
17. Tape: Press to play the tape.
18. CD door: Insert the disc with the playing side down and printed side
up.
19. Tape door: Insert the tape facing the right.
23
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
AM/FM STEREO / SINGLE CD RADIO (IF EQUIPPED)
13
16 17
14
1
2
3
4
15
18
VOL - PUSH ON
AM
FM
ST
SCN
CLK
FM1
BASS
TREB
BAL
FADE
CD
DISC
12
11
SEEK
TUNE
EJ
COMP
CD
CD
SHUFFLE
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
5
10
9
8
7
1. Balance: Press
/
to shift
sound to the left/right speakers.
2. Fade: Press
/
to shift
sound to the front/rear speakers.
3. SCN (Scan): Press to hear a
brief sampling of all listenable
stations or CD tracks. Press again to
stop.
4. CLK: To set the hour, press and
hold CLK and press SEEK to
CLK
decrease
hours.
or increase
the
24
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
To set the minute, press and hold CLK and press TUNE to decrease
or increase
the minutes.
5. EJ (eject): Press to eject a CD.
6. COMP (Compression): In CD
mode, press to bring louder and
softer levels into more comfortable
listening level. The compression icon (c) will appear in the display.
SHUFFLE
7. Shuffle: Press to listen to the
6
tracks on the CD in random order.
Press again to turn off.
8. Memory presets: To set a
CD
CD
SHUFFLE
6
1
2
3
4
5
station: Select frequency band
AM/FM; tune to a station. Press and
hold a preset button until sound returns. This radio is equipped with six
station memory preset controls which allow you to set up to six AM
stations and 12 FM stations (six in FM1 and six in FM2).
9. CD:
Press and hold until
desired point of a selection is
reached.
10.
CD: Press and hold until
desired point of a selection is
reached.
11. Tune: In radio mode, press to
move up or down the frequency
band in individual increments.
12. Seek: Press and release
SEEK
/
for previous/next
strong station, selection or track.
13. Power/volume: Press to turn
ON/OFF; turn to increase or
decrease volume levels.
25
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
14. CD: Press to enter CD mode or
to play a CD already loaded into the
system.
15. AM/FM: Press to choose a
frequency band in radio mode.
16. Bass: Press
/
to
increase/decrease the bass output.
17. Treble: Press
/
to
increase/decrease the treble output.
DISC
18. CD slot: Insert a CD printed
side up.
CD units are designed to play
commercially pressed 4.75 in (12 cm) audio compact discs only.
Due to technical incompatibility, certain recordable and
re-recordable compact discs may not function correctly when
used in Ford CD players. Irregular shaped CDs, CDs with a
scratch protection film attached, and CDs with homemade paper
(adhesive) labels should not be inserted into the CD player. The
label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed. It is
recommended that homemade CDs be identified with permanent
felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may
damage CDs. Please contact your dealer for further information.
26
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
AM/FM STEREO (IF EQUIPPED)
5
6
7
1
2
VOL
PUSH
ON
ST DX
FM
TONE VOL
SEEK
TUNE
TONE
CLK
12
1
2
3
4
AM/FM
3
4
1. Seek: Press
/
to find the
next strong station down/up the
frequency band.
2. Tune: Press
/
to manually
change radio frequency down/up.
3. AM/FM: Press to choose a
frequency band in radio mode.
AM/FM
4. Memory preset buttons: To set
a station: Select frequency band
AM/FM; tune to a station, press and
1
2
3
4
hold a preset button until sound returns.
27
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
5. Power/volume: Press to turn
ON/OFF; turn to increase or
decrease volume levels.
VOL
PUSH
ON
6. Tone: Press TONE until the
desired level — Bass, Treble, Fade
appears on the display. Turn the
volume control to raise/lower the
levels, or to move the audio sound
from the right to left or the front to
back (if equipped).
TONE
CLK
7. CLK (Clock): To set the hour,
press and hold CLK until CLOCK
SET appears in the display. Press
TONE
CLK
SEEK to decrease
increase the hours.
To set the minute, press and hold CLK until CLOCK set appears in the
or
display. Press TUNE to decrease
or increase
the minutes.
28
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
AM/FM STEREO CASSETTE (IF EQUIPPED)
12
13 14 15 16 17
1
2
3
4
VOL - PUSH ON
ST
CLK
AM
FM
FM1
BASS
TREB
BAL
FADE
TAPE
AMS
11
SEEK
TUNE
SIDE
REW
1 - 2
FF
SCAN
EJ
10
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
6
5
7
8
1. Balance: Press to shift sound to
the left/right speakers.
2. Fade: Press to shift sound to the
rear/front speakers.
3. CLK: To set the hour, press and
hold CLK. Then press SEEK to
CLK
decrease
hours.
or increase
the
To set the minute, press and hold CLK and press TUNE to decrease
or increase the minutes.
29
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
TAPE
AMS
4. Tape AMS: In tape mode, press
and hold to activate Automatic
Music Search (allows you to quickly
locate the beginning of the tape selection being played or to skip to the
next selection). Then, press REW (for the beginning of the current
selection) or FF (to advance to the next selection). The tape MUST have
a blank section of at least four seconds duration between programs.
5. Side 1–2: Press to change tape
direction.
SIDE
1 - 2
6. REW (rewind): Press to rewind
the tape.
REW
FF (fast forward): Press to
advance the tape.
FF
7. Memory preset buttons: To set
a station: Select frequency band
AM/FM1/FM2; tune to a station,
press and hold a preset button until sound returns.
8.
Dolby noise reduction: Works in tape mode only. Reduces tape
noise and hiss; press to activate/deactivate.
9. Scan: Press SCAN to hear a brief
sampling of all listenable radio
stations or all tape selections. Press
again to stop.
10. Tune: Works in radio mode only.
Press TUNE
/
to change
frequency down/up
11. Seek: Press and
release
/
for previous/next
strong station, selection or track.
12. Power/volume: Press to turn
ON/OFF; turn to increase or
decrease volume levels.
30
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
13. AM/FM: Press to choose a
frequency band in radio mode.
14. Bass: Press
/
to
decrease/increase the bass output.
15. Treble: Press
/
to
decrease/increase the treble output.
16. EJ (Eject): Press to eject a
tape.
EJ
17. Cassette door: Insert a cassette into the cassette door.
CD CHANGER (IF EQUIPPED)
Your CD changer is either located in the trunk, the console or the right
side cargo area storage compartment.
1. Slide the door to access the CD
changer magazine.
2. Press
to eject the magazine.
31
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
3. Turn the magazine (A) over.
B
A
4. Using the disc holder release
knob (C), pull the disc holder (B)
out of the magazine.
C
Do not pull too hard on the disc holder as the disc holder may come
completely out of the magazine. If this happens, reinsert the disc holder
back into the magazine while pressing on the lever.
5. Line up the CD with the groove
of the disc holder. Ensure that the
label on the CD faces downwards.
6. Press the disc holder until it locks
securely into the magazine.
Ensure that the disc holder is
evenly inserted and at the same
A
level as the magazine (A). The unit
will not operate if the disc holder is
not inserted at the same level (B).
B
RADIO FREQUENCIES
AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:
AM - 530, 540–1700, 1710 kHz
FM- 87.7, 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz
32
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
RADIO RECEPTION FACTORS
There are three factors that can affect radio reception:
• Distance/strength: The further you travel from an FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, power lines, electric fences,
traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
• Station overload: When you pass a broadcast tower, a stronger signal
may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency
is displayed.
CASSETTE/PLAYER CARE
Do:
• Use only cassettes that are 90 minutes long or less.
• Tighten very loose tapes by inserting a finger or pencil into the hole
and turning the hub.
• Remove loose labels before inserting tapes.
• Allow tapes which have been subjected to extreme heat, humidity or
cold to reach a moderate temperature before playing.
• Clean the cassette player head with a cassette cleaning cartridge after
10–12 hours of play to maintain good sound/operation.
Don’t:
• Expose tapes to direct sunlight, extreme humidity, heat or cold.
• Leave tapes in the cassette player for a long time when not being
played.
CD/CD PLAYER CARE
Do:
• Handle discs by their edges only. Never touch the playing surface.
• Inspect discs before playing. Clean only with an approved CD cleaner
and wipe from the center out.
Don’t:
• Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods
of time.
• Insert more than one disc into each slot of the CD changer magazine.
• Clean using a circular motion.
33
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in (12
cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,
certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not
function correctly when used in Ford CD players. Irregular
shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs
with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted
into the CD player. The label may peel and cause the CD to
become jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be
identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive
labels. Ball point pens may damage CDs. Please contact your
dealer for further information.
AUDIO SYSTEM WARRANTY AND SERVICE
Refer to the Warranty Guide for audio system warranty information. If
service is necessary, see your dealer or qualified technician.
34
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
Climate Controls
MANUAL HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
(IF EQUIPPED)
1
2
3
1. Fan speed adjustment: Controls
the volume of air circulated in the
vehicle.
LO
OFF
VENT
FLOOR
MIX
NORM
A/C
2. Temperature selection:
Controls the temperature of the
airflow in the vehicle.
MAX
A/C
HI
3. Air flow selections: Controls the direction of the airflow in the
vehicle. See the following for a brief description on each control.
MAX A/C: Uses recirculated air to cool the vehicle. Air flows from the
instrument panel vents only. This mode will help prevent unpleasant
odors from entering the vehicle.
NORM A/C: Uses outside air to cool the vehicle. Air flows from the
instrument panel vents only.
VENT: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents.
OFF: Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate.
FLOOR: Distributes outside air through the floor vents.
MIX: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents, floor
vents and side window demisters.
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and
the side window demisters.
Operating tips
• To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place
the air flow selector in the
position.
• To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle: do not drive with the
air flow selector in the OFF or MAX A/C position.
• Under normal weather conditions, do not leave the air flow selector in
MAX A/C or OFF when the vehicle is parked. This allows the vehicle
to “breathe” using the outside air inlet vents.
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the back seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
35
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:
1. Select NORM A/C.
2. Modulate the temperature control to maintain comfort.
3. Set the fan speed to HI.
4. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.
To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents
located in the middle of the instrument panel.
Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as these
objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop.
ELECTRONIC AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL (EATC)
SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
10
11
1
2
3
HI
OFF
F
AUTO
OUTSIDE TEMP
AUTOMATIC
DEF
MAX A/C
NORM A/C
VENT
FLOOR
FLR•DEF
LO
9
8
7
6
5
4
1. OFF: Outside air is shut out and
the fan will not operate.
2. AUTOMATIC: Press
AUTOMATIC and select the desired
temperature using the temperature
controls. The system will automatically determine fan speed, airflow
location, and outside or recirculated air to heat or cool the vehicle to the
selected temperature. The fan speed will remain automatic unless the
thumbwheel is turned.
36
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
3. Fan speed: Turn to manually
increase or decrease fan speed.
4. Defrost:
Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster
vents and the side window demisters.
5. Floor/defrost: Distributes outside air through the windshield
defroster vents, floor vents and the side window demisters.
6. Floor: Distributes outside air through the floor vents.
7. Vent: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents.
8. Norm A/C: Uses outside air to cool the vehicle . Air flows from the
instrument panel vents only.
9. Max A/C: Uses recirculated air to cool the vehicle. Air flows from the
instrument panel vents only. This mode will help prevent unpleasant
odors from entering the vehicle.
10. Outside Temp: Press to display
the outside temperature. It will
remain in the display until pressed
again. The temperature will be most accurate when the vehicle is in
motion.
11. Temperature control: Press this control to select the temperature.
The display window indicates the selected temperature.
Fahrenheit/Celsius temperature: Press MAX A/C and DEF
simultaneously to toggle between Fahrenheit and Celsius temperature.
The set point temperatures in Celsius will be displayed in half-degree
increments.
Operating tips
• To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place
the air flow selector in the
position.
• To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle: do not drive with the
air flow selector in the OFF or MAX A/C position.
• Under normal weather conditions, do not leave the air flow selector in
MAX A/C or OFF when the vehicle is parked. This allows the vehicle
to “breathe” using the outside air inlet vents.
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the back seats.
37
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:
1. Select NORM A/C.
2. Modulate the temperature control to maintain comfort.
3. Set the fan speed to HI.
4. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.
To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents
located in the middle of the instrument panel.
Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as these
objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop.
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER
The rear defroster control is located
on the instrument panel.
Press the rear defroster control to
clear the rear window of thin ice
and fog. A small LED will illuminate
when the rear defroster is activated.
The ignition must be in the ON position to operate the rear window
defroster.
The defroster turns off automatically after a predetermined amount of
time or when the ignition is turned to the OFF position. To manually
turn off the defroster, press the control again.
Activating the rear window defroster will also activate the heated mirrors
(if equipped). For more information refer to Heated outside mirrors in
the Driver controls chapter.
Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean the inside
of the rear window or to remove decals from the inside of the
rear window. This may cause damage to the heated grid lines and
will not be covered by your warranty.
38
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
Lights
HEADLAMP CONTROL
Turns the lamps off.
Turns on the parking
lamps, instrument panel lamps,
license plate lamps and tail lamps.
Turns the headlamps on.
Autolamp control
The autolamp system provides light
sensitive automatic on-off control of
the exterior lights normally
controlled by the headlamp control.
The autolamp system also keeps the
lights on for a predetermined period
of time after the ignition switch is
turned to OFF.
• To turn autolamps on, rotate the
control counterclockwise to the
next position from OFF.
• To turn autolamps off, rotate the control clockwise past OFF to the
parking lamp position , then back to OFF.
The headlamps will turn on under the following conditions:
1. Headlamp switch is turned to the “headlamps on position”.
2. With the ignition in ON or START, wipers turned on and the headlamp
switch in the autolamp position.
Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped)
Turns the lowbeam headlamps on with a reduced output. To activate:
• the key must be in the ON position,
• the parking brake released, and
• the headlamp control is in the OFF or parking lamps position.
39
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
Always remember to turn on your headlamps at dusk or during
inclement weather. The Daytime Running Light (DRL) System
does not activate your tail lamps and generally may not provide
adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate your
headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision.
High beams
Push the lever toward the
instrument panel to activate. Pull
the lever towards you to deactivate.
Flash to pass
Pull toward you slightly to activate
and release to deactivate.
PANEL DIMMER CONTROL
Use to adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel during headlamp
and parklamp operation.
• Rotate the thumbwheel from left
to right to brighten the
instrument panel.
• Rotate the thumbwheel from right
to left to dim the instrument
panel.
40
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
Domelamp Control
The panel dimmer control also controls the domelamp operation.
• Rotate the thumbwheel fully to the right, past detent to activate the
domelamp.
• In order to turn off the domelamp, rotate the thumbwheel to the left.
AIMING THE HEADLAMPS
The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant.
If your vehicle has been in an accident the alignment of your headlamps
should be checked by a qualified service technician.
TURN SIGNAL CONTROL
• Push down to activate the left
turn signal.
• Push up to activate the right turn
signal.
The flash rate of the turn signal will speed up considerably if the left or
right turn lamp bulb (front or rear) is burned out.
MAP/COURTESY LAMPS
The courtesy lamps light when:
• any door is opened.
• the instrument panel dimmer
switch is rotated past the detent.
• the UNLOCK control of the
remote entry controls is pressed
and the ignition is OFF.
The reading lamps can be turned on
by pressing the rocker controls next
to each lamp.
If equipped with Remote Keyless Entry, the courtesy lamp will illuminate
whenever any door is opened and will remain on for 25 seconds after the
door is shut or when the ignition is turned to the ON position.
41
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
With overhead console
With overhead console and moon
roof
To turn on the map lamps, press the
map lamp control.
REAR COURTESY/READING LAMPS
Rotate the lens to illuminate the
lamp. With the lens in the flat
position, the courtesy lamp lights
when:
• Any door is opened.
• The panel dimmer thumbwheel is
rotated fully to the right past
detent.
42
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
BULBS
Replacing exterior bulbs
Check the operation of all the bulbs frequently.
Using the right bulbs
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs
must be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America and an
“E” for Europe to assure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern
and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly
or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn
time.
Function
Trade Number
Headlamp
9007
Park lamp and turn lamp (front)
Side marker (front)
Tail, stop, turn (rear)
Side marker (rear)
Backup lamp
License plate lamp
High-mount brakelamp
Luggage compartment lamp
Rear reading lamp
Map lamp
3457 AK (amber)
194 AK (amber)
3157K
194
3156K
168
912
212-2
578
906
Dual floorwell lamp
Glove compartment
Visor vanity lamp
906
168
7065
All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted.
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your dealer.
Replacing the interior bulbs
Check the operation of all bulbs frequently.
43
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
Replacing headlamp bulbs
To remove the headlamp bulb:
1. Make sure headlamp switch is in OFF position, then open the hood.
2. Remove the radiator cover by turning the three knobs to the unlock
position.
3. Disconnect the electrical
connector from the bulb by pulling
rearward.
4. Remove the bulb retaining ring by
rotating it counterclockwise (when
viewed from the rear) to free it
from the bulb socket, and slide the
ring off the plastic base. Keep the
ring to retain the new bulb.
5. Without turning, remove the old
bulb from the lamp assembly by
gently pulling it straight back out of
the lamp assembly.
To install the new bulb:
Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of
children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do
not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to
break the next time the headlamps are operated.
Note: If the bulb is accidentally touched, it should be cleaned with
rubbing alcohol before being used.
1. With the flat side of the new bulb’s plastic base facing upward, insert
the glass end of the bulb into the lamp assembly. Turn the bulb left or
right to align the grooves in the plastic base with the tabs in the lamp
assembly. When the grooves are aligned, push the bulb into the lamp
assembly until the plastic base contacts the rear of the lamp assembly.
2. Install the bulb retaining ring over the plastic base until it contacts the
rear of the socket by rotating it clockwise until you feel a “stop.”
44
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
3. Connect the electrical connector into the rear of the plastic base until
it snaps, locking it into position.
4. Install the protective cover over headlamps locking it in place with
three knobs.
5. Turn the headlamps on and make sure they work properly. If the
headlamp was correctly aligned before you changed the bulb, you should
not need to align it again.
Replacing front parking lamp/turn signal bulbs
The park/turn lamp bulbs can be replaced without removing the
headlamp assembly.
1. Make sure headlamp switch is in the OFF position, then open the
hood.
2. Remove the radiator cover by turning the three knobs to the unlock
position.
3. Loosen the parking lamp retainer, on the outside of the lamp, unscrew
and pull the lamp assembly forward.
4. Disconnect the electrical
connector from the bulb by pulling
rearward.
5. Rotate the bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove from
lamp assembly.
6. Carefully pull bulb straight out of
the socket and push in the new bulb
until it snaps, locking it into
position.
7. To complete installation, follow the removal procedure in reverse
order.
45
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
Replacing tail lamp/brake/turn lamp bulbs
The tail lamp, the brake lamp and the turn signal lamp bulbs are located
in the tail lamp assembly. Follow the same steps to replace either bulb.
1. Make sure headlamp switch is in
OFF position, then open the trunk
and remove plastic retainer to
expose the lamp assembly hardware.
2. Carefully pull the carpet away to
expose the plastic retainer.
3. Remove three nut and washer
assemblies and the lamp assembly
from the vehicle.
4. Remove the bulb socket by
rotating it counterclockwise, then
pulling it out of the lamp assembly.
5. Pull the bulb from the socket and
push in the new bulb.
6. Install the bulb socket into the
lamp assembly by rotating it
clockwise.
7. Install the lamp assembly on the
vehicle with three nut and washer
assemblies ensuring the washers on
the nuts are flush with the body to prevent water from entering the
trunk.
8. Install the plastic retainer and carefully push the carpet back in to
place.
46
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
Replacing license plate lamp bulbs
1. Make sure headlamp switch is in
OFF position, then remove two
screws, grommets and the license
plate lamp assembly from the trunk
lid.
2. Carefully pull the bulb from the
socket and push in the new bulb.
3. Install the lamp assembly on
trunk lid with two grommets,
ensuring the grommets are pushed
all the way into the trunk lid and secure with two screws.
Replacing backup lamp bulbs
1. Make sure headlamp switch is in
OFF position, then open trunk and
remove bulb socket from the trunk
lid by turning counterclockwise.
2. Pull the bulb straight out of the
socket and push in the new bulb.
3. Install the bulb socket in trunk lid
by turning clockwise.
Replacing high-mount brakelamp bulbs
1. Make sure headlamp switch is in
OFF position, then remove two
screws from the lamp assembly.
2. Carefully lift the lamp assembly
up for access to the bulbs.
47
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
3. Carefully pull the bulb socket out
of the lamp assembly.
4. Pull the bulb straight out of the
socket and push in the new bulb.
To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Overhead console lamps
To remove and replace the lamps in the overhead console:
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the OFF position and remove the
overhead console from the
headliner.
2. Remove the bulb socket from the
back of the lamp housing by pulling
it straight out.
3. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pulling straight out.
Install the new bulb in reverse order.
48
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Driver Controls
MULTI-FUNCTION LEVER
Windshield wiper: Rotate the end
of the control away from you to
increase the speed of the wipers;
rotate towards you to decrease the
speed of the wipers.
Windshield washer: Push the end
of the stalk:
• briefly: causes a single swipe of
the wipers without washer fluid.
• a quick push and hold: the wipers
will swipe three times with
washer fluid.
• a long push and hold: the wipers and washer fluid will be activated for
up to ten seconds.
Windshield wiper/washer features
The exterior lamps will turn on with the ignition on, Headlamp control in
the Autolamp position and the windshield wipers are turned on.
Changing the wiper blades
1. Pull the wiper arm away from the
glass one to two inches and proceed
to step 2.
2. Pull the retainer clip of the blade
up and slide the blade off the wiper
arm pin.
3. To attach the new wiper blade,
pull the retainer clip of the blade up
and slide the blade into the wiper
arm pin, then push down the
retainer clip to lock position..
4. Clean blades and glass as recommended in Cleaning chapter and
replace wiper blades every 6 months or before winter for optimum
performance
5. Poor wiper quality can sometimes be improved by cleaning the wiper
blades, refer to Window and wiper blades in the Cleaning chapter.
49
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
6. To prolong the life of the wiper blades, it is highly recommended to
scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers. The
layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the
wiper rubber element.
TILT STEERING WHEEL
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull and hold the steering wheel
release control toward you.
2. Move the steering wheel up or
down until you find the desired
location.
3. Release the steering wheel
release control. This will lock the
steering wheel in position.
Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving.
ILLUMINATED VISOR MIRROR (IF EQUIPPED)
Lift the mirror cover to turn on the
visor mirror lamps.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE WITHOUT MOON ROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
The appearance of your vehicle’s overhead console will vary according to
your option package. Some of the features in the overhead console
include a compass and HomeLink. To program the Homelink, refer to
Homelink Wireless Control System it this chapter.
Electronic compass display (if equipped)
Compass: The compass display is contained in the overhead console.
The vehicle heading is displayed as one of N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W and
NW.
50
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large
buildings, bridges, power lines and powerful broadcast antenna. Magnetic
or metallic objects placed in or on the vehicle may also affect compass
accuracy. Adjustments may need to be made to the zone and calibration
of the compass.
Compass zone adjustment
1. Determine which magnetic zone
you are in by referring to the zone
map.
3 2
4
1
15
14
13
2. Turn the ignition to the ON
position.
5
12
6
7 8 91011
3. Press and hold the MODE control
until VAR appears in the display,
then release. The display should
show the current zone number.
4. Press the MODE control until the
desired zone number appears. The
display will flash and then return to
normal operation. The zone is now
updated.
Compass calibration adjustment
Perform this adjustment in an open
area free from steel structures and
high voltage lines:
1. Press and hold the MODE control
until CAL appears in the display
(approximately eight seconds) and
release.
2. Drive the vehicle slowly (less
than 5 km/h [3 mph]) in circles until
CAL indicator turns off in about 2–3 complete circles.
3. The compass is now calibrated.
51
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
OVERHEAD CONSOLE WITH MOON ROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
The appearance of your vehicle’s overhead console will vary according to
your option package. Some of the features in the overhead console
include Compass, Homelink, and Moon Roof controls.
Compass mode
The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large
buildings, bridges, power lines and powerful broadcast antenna. Magnetic
or metallic objects placed in, on or near the vehicle may also affect
compass accuracy.
1. Turn ignition to the ON position.
2. Start the engine.
3. From a blank display press and
release the MODE button once. The
directional heading will be
displayed.
Note: If the compass is
de-calibrated, CAL will be displayed
in the right corner of the display.
Refer to “Calibration mode” in this
section for more details.
4. The overhead console displays the compass heading in one of eight
directions: NORTH, NORTHEAST, EAST, SOUTHEAST, SOUTH,
SOUTHWEST, WEST, and NORTHWEST.
Zone variation mode
Most geographic areas (zones) have a magnetic north compass point that
varies slightly from the northerly direction on maps. A correct zone
setting will eliminate compass heading error.
To set the compass zone:
1. Press and release the MODE
button until the compass directional
heading is displayed.
52
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
2. Hold down the MODE button for
5 seconds to enter zone mode. The
display will read PRESS RESET TO
SET ZONE XX where XX is the
current zone.
3. Release the MODE button.
4. Determine which magnetic zone
you are in by referring to the zone
map.
3 2
4
1
15
5. Repeatedly press and release the
RESET button to scroll through the
zones 1–15 until the desired zone is
displayed.
14
13
5
12
6. Press the MODE button to save
the new zone setting and return to
the compass normal mode.
6
7 8 91011
Note: The compass exits the zone
setting mode and returns to its previous setting after one minute of no
activity.
Note: If power is interrupted during the zone setting process, the
compass resets to the same zone it was set to before the zone change
process was started.
Calibration mode
For optimum calibration, turn off all electrical accessories (heater/air
conditioning, wipers, etc.) and make sure all vehicle doors are shut.
To calibrate the compass:
1. Press and release the MODE
button until the compass directional
heading is displayed.
53
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
2. Hold down the MODE button for
10 seconds to enter the calibration
mode. The display will read PRESS
RESET TO DECAL.
3. Release the MODE button.
4. Press the RESET button to
de-calibrate the compass. The
display will read CIRCLE SLOWLY
TO CALIBRATE for a few seconds
and then display a direction with
CAL displayed on the right side.
5. Drive the vehicle in a tight circle
in a magnetically clean area such as
an open parking lot.
6. Slowly drive the vehicle in a circle (less than 3 mph [5 km/h]). This
will take up to three circles to complete calibration.
7. The correct compass heading will be displayed when the compass is
calibrated.
Note: If the RESET button is not pressed, the compass will exit
calibration mode after three minutes of no activity and the original
calibration data will be restored.
Note: If power is interrupted during the calibration process, the compass
resets to the original calibration data from before the calibration process
started.
HomeLinkா wireless control system (if equipped)
The HomeLink Wireless Control System, located on the overhead
console, provides a convenient way to replace up to three hand-held
transmitters with a single built-in device. This feature will learn the radio
frequency codes of most transmitters to operate garage doors, entry gate
operators, security systems, entry door locks, and home or office lighting.
When programming your HomeLink Wireless Control System to a
garage door or gate, be sure that people and objects are out of the way
to prevent potential harm or damage. Do not use the HomeLink
Wireless Control System with any garage door opener that lacks safety
stop and reverse features as required by U.S. federal safety standards
(this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before
April 1, 1982). A garage door which cannot detect an object, signaling
54
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
the door to stop and reverse, does not meet current U.S. federal safety
standards. For more information, contact HomeLink at:
www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515. Retain the original
transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future programming
procedures (i.e. new HomeLink equipped vehicle purchase). It is also
suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink
buttons be erased for security purposes, refer to Programming in this
section.
Programming
Do not program the HomeLink with the vehicle parked in the
garage.
Note: Some vehicles may require the ignition switch to be turned to the
second (or “ACC”) position for programming and/or operation of the
HomeLink. It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the
hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for
quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
1. Press and hold the two outside
buttons. The message CLEARING
CHANNELS will appear on the
HomeLink display.
• After about 20 seconds, the
message CHANNELS CLEARED
will appear.
Do not repeat step one to program additional hand-held transmitters to
the remaining two HomeLink buttons. This will erase previously
programmed hand-held transmitter signals into HomeLink.
55
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 1–3 inches (2–8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program (located on your
overhead console) while keeping the display in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold
both the HomeLink and hand-held
transmitter button. The message
CHANNEL “X” (1,2 or 3) TRAINING
will appear on the display. Do not
release the buttons until step 4
has been completed.
Some entry gates and garage door openers may require you to replace
step 3 with procedures noted in the “Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming” section for Canadian residents.
4. When the message CHANNEL “X”
(1,2 or 3) TRAINED appears on the
display, release both the HomeLink
and hand held transmitter buttons.
• DID NOT TRAIN will be displayed
if the channel did not properly
train.
5. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink button and observe the
HomeLink house icon on the display. If the indicator light(s)
56
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
underneath the house icon are constant, programming is complete and
your device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed and
released. Note: To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons,
begin with step 2 in the “Programming” section — do not repeat step 1.
If the indicator light(s) underneath the house icon blink rapidly for two
seconds and then turn to a continuous light, proceed with steps 6
through 8 to complete programming of a rolling code equipped device.
6. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage,
locate the “learn” or “smart” button (usually near where the hanging
antenna wire is attached to the unit).
7. Press and release the “learn” or “smart” button. (The name and color
of the button may vary by manufacturer.)
Note: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step eight.
8. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two seconds and
release the HomeLink button. Repeat the press/hold/release sequence
again, and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener (or other
rolling code equipped device), repeat this sequence a third time to
complete the programming.
HomeLink should now activate your rolling code equipped device. To
program additional HomeLink buttons begin with step 2 in the
“Programming” section. For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.
Gate operator & Canadian programming
During programming, your hand-held transmitter may automatically stop
transmitting — not allowing enough time for HomeLink to accept the
signal from the hand-held transmitter. After completing steps 1 and 2
outlined in the “Programming” section, replace step 3 with the following:
After completing steps 1 and 2 outlined in the “Programming” section,
replace step 3 with the following:
Note: If programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is
advised to unplug the device during the “cycling” process to prevent
overheating.
57
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
• Continue to press and hold the
HomeLink button (note step 3
in the “Programming” section)
while you press and release —
every two seconds (“cycle”)
your hand-held transmitter until
the frequency signal has been
accepted by the HomeLink. The
message CHANNEL “X” (1,2 or 3)
TRAINING will appear on the
display.
• Proceed with step 4 in the “Programming” section.
Operating the HomeLinkா Wireless Control System
To operate, simply press and release the appropriate HomeLink button.
Activation will now occur for the trained product (garage door, gate
operator, security system, entry door lock, or home or office lighting
etc.). For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the device may also
be used at any time. In the event that there are still programming
difficulties, contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com or
1–800–355–3515.
Erasing HomeLinkா buttons
To erase the three programmed buttons (individual buttons cannot be
erased):
• Press and hold the two outside
buttons. The message CLEARING
CHANNELS will appear on the
HomeLink display.
58
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
• After about 20 seconds, the
message CHANNELS CLEARED
will appear on the display. Do not
hold for longer that 30 seconds.
HomeLink is now in the train
(or learning) mode and can be
programmed at any time
beginning with step 2 in the
“Programming” section.
Reprogramming a single HomeLinkா button
To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink button previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired
HomeLink button. DO NOT
release the button. The display will
read CHANNEL “X” (1,2 or 3)
TRANSMIT
2. The display will change to
CHANNEL “X” (1,2, or 3)
TRAINING after 20 seconds.
Without releasing the HomeLink
button, follow step 2 in the
“Programming” section.
For questions or comments, contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com
or 1–800–355–3515.
59
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
AUXILIARY POWER POINT (12VDC)
The auxiliary power point for five passenger vehicles is located in the
floor console storage bin. For six passenger vehicles, the auxiliary power
point is located under the cup holder and ashtray drawer in the center
stack.
Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigarette lighter. Use
the power point.
Do not use the power point for operating the cigarette lighter element.
The Maximum power each power point can supply depends on the fuse
rating. For example: a 20A fuse should supply a maximum of 240 Watts,
a 15A fuse should supply a maximum of 180 Watts and a 10A fuse should
supply a maximum of 120 Watts. Exceeding these limits will result in a
blown fuse.
Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used.
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not hang
any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug.
Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered
by your warranty.
POWER WINDOWS (IF EQUIPPED)
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let
children play with the power windows. They may seriously injure
themselves.
When closing the power windows, you should verify they are free
of obstructions and ensure that children and/or pets are not in
the proximity of the window openings.
Press and hold the bottom part of
the rocker switch to open the
window. Press and hold the top part
of the rocker switch to close the
window.
60
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
One touch down
Allows the driver’s window to open
fully without holding the control
down. Press completely down on
the bottom part of the rocker switch
and release quickly. Press the top
part of the rocker switch to stop.
Window lock
The window lock feature allows only
the driver to operate the power
windows.
To lock out all the window controls
except for the driver’s press the left
side of the control. Press the right
side to restore the window controls.
POWER SIDE VIEW MIRRORS
To adjust your mirrors:
1. Select
mirror or
mirror.
to adjust the left
to adjust the right
2. Move the control in the direction
you wish to tilt the mirror.
3. Return to the center position to
lock mirrors in place.
61
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Heated outside mirrors
(if equipped)
Both mirrors are heated
automatically to remove ice, mist
and fog when the rear window
defrost is activated.
Do not remove ice from the
mirrors with a scraper or
attempt to readjust the mirror
glass if it is frozen in place.
These actions could cause
damage to the glass and mirrors.
Fold-away mirrors
Pull the side mirrors in carefully
when driving through a narrow
space, like an automatic car wash.
Automatic dimming inside rear view mirror (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with
an inside rear view mirror with an
auto-dimming function. The
electronic day/night mirror will
change from the normal (high
reflective) state to the non-glare
(darkened) state when bright lights (glare) reach the mirror. When the
mirror detects bright light from behind the vehicle, it will automatically
adjust (darken) to minimize glare.
The mirror will automatically return to the normal state whenever the
vehicle is placed in R (Reverse) to ensure a bright clear view when
backing up.
Do not block the sensor on the backside of the inside rear view mirror
since this may impair proper mirror performance.
62
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
POWER ADJUSTABLE FOOT PEDALS (IF EQUIPPED)
The accelerator and brake pedal
should only be adjusted when the
vehicle is stopped and the gearshift
lever is in the P (Park) position.
Press and hold the rocker control to
adjust accelerator and brake pedal.
• Press the right side of the control to adjust the pedals toward you.
• Press the left side of the control to adjust the pedals away from you.
The adjustment allows for approximately 2.5 inches (65 mm) of
maximum travel.
Never adjust the accelerator and brake pedal with feet on the
pedals while the vehicle is moving.
SPEED CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
With speed control set, you can maintain a speed of 30 mph (48 km/h)
or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. Speed
control does not work at speeds below 30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that
are winding, slippery or unpaved.
Setting speed control
The controls for using your speed
control are located on the steering
wheel for your convenience.
1. Press the ON control and release
it.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.
63
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
3. Press the SET + control and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
5. The message “SPEED CONTROL”
(if equipped) will be displayed in
the optional instrument cluster.
Note:
• Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a
steep hill.
• If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill, you
may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed.
• If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below
your set speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage.
Disengaging speed control
To disengage the speed control:
• Depress the brake pedal
Disengaging the speed control will not erase previous set speed.
Resuming a set speed
Press the RESUME control and
release it. This will automatically
return the vehicle to the previously
set speed. The RESUME control will
not work if the vehicle speed is not
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h).
64
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Increasing speed while using speed control
There are two ways to set a higher
speed:
• Press and hold the SET + control
until you get to the desired
speed, then release the control.
You can also use the SET +
control to operate the Tap-Up
function. Press and release this
control to increase the vehicle set
speed in small amounts by 1 mph
(1.6 km/h).
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed. When the
vehicle reaches that speed press and release the SET + control.
Reducing speed while using speed control
There are two ways to reduce a set
speed:
• Press and hold the SET - control
until you get to the desired
speed, then release the control.
You can also use the SET -
control to operate the Tap-Down
function. Press and release this
control to decrease the vehicle
set speed in small amounts by 1
mph (1.6 km/h).
• Depress the brake pedal until the
desired vehicle speed is reached,
press the SET + control.
65
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Turning off speed control
There are two ways to turn off the speed control:
• Depress the brake pedal. This will
not erase your vehicle’s
previously set speed.
• Press the speed control OFF
control.
Note: When you turn the speed
control or the ignition off, your
speed control set speed memory is
erased.
STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED)
Audio control features
In Radio mode:
• Press NEXT to select the next
preset station within the current
radio band.
In Tape mode:
• Press NEXT to listen to the next
selection on the tape.
In CD mode:
• Press NEXT to listen to the next
track on the disc.
In any mode:
• Press VOL + or - to adjust the
volume.
66
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Climate control features
• Press TEMP + or - to adjust
temperature.
MOON ROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
To open the moon roof:
• Press and hold the control
forward to raise the moon roof to
the vent position (when the glass
panel is closed).
• For one-touch operation, press
the control rearward and release;
this will fully open the moon roof.
• To stop one-touch operation at
the desired position, press the
control in any direction and
release.
To close the moon roof:
• Press and hold the control forward.
• To close from the vent position, press and hold the control rearward.
Do not let children play with the moon roof or leave children
unattended in the vehicle. They may seriously hurt themselves.
HOMELINKா WIRELESS CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The HomeLink Wireless Control System, located on the overhead
console, provides a convenient way to replace up to three hand-held
transmitters with a single built-in device. This feature will learn the radio
frequency codes of most transmitters to operate garage doors, entry gate
operators, security systems, entry door locks, and home or office lighting.
67
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
When programming your HomeLink Wireless Control System to
a garage door or gate, be sure that people and objects are out of
the way to prevent potential harm or damage.
Do not use the HomeLink Wireless Control System with any garage
door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by
U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door which cannot
detect an object, signaling the door to stop and reverse, does not meet
current U.S. federal safety standards. For more information, contact
HomeLink at: www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.
Retain the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for
future programming procedures (i.e. new HomeLink equipped vehicle
purchase). It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the
programmed Homelink buttons be erased for security purposes, refer to
Programming in this section.
Programming
Do not program HomeLink with the vehicle parked in the garage.
Note: Some vehicles may require the ignition switch to be turned to the
second (or “ACC”) position for programming and/or operation of the
HomeLink. It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the
hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for
quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
1. Press and hold the two outside
buttons releasing only when the
indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds. Do not repeat step one
to program additional hand-held
transmitters to the remaining two
HomeLink buttons. This will erase
previously programmed hand-held
transmitter signals into HomeLink.
2. Position the end of your
hand-held transmitter 1–3 inches
(2–8 cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
(located on your overhead console) while keeping the indicator light in
view.
68
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
3. Simultaneously press and hold
both the HomeLink and hand-held
transmitter button. Do not release
the buttons until step 4 has been
completed.
Some entry gates and garage door
openers may require you to replace
step 3 with procedures noted in the
“Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming” section for Canadian
residents.
4. The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly. Release both
buttons when the indicator light flashes rapidly. (The rapid flashing light
indicates acceptance of the hand-held transmitters’ radio frequency
signals.)
5. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink button and observe the
indicator light. If the light is constant, programming is complete and your
device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed and
released. Note: To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons,
begin with step 2 in the “Programming” section — do not repeat step 1.
Note: If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns
to a continuous light, proceed with steps 6 through 8 to complete
programming of a rolling code equipped device.
6. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage,
locate the “learn” or “smart” button (usually near where the hanging
antenna wire is attached to the unit).
7. Press and release the “learn” or “smart” button. (The name and color
of the button may vary by manufacturer.)
Note: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step eight.
8. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two seconds and
release the HomeLink button. Repeat the press/hold/release sequence
again, and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener (or other
rolling code equipped device), repeat this sequence a third time to
complete the programming.
HomeLink should now activate your rolling code equipped device. To
program additional HomeLink buttons begin with step 2 in the
“Programming” section. For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.
69
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Gate Operator & Canadian Programming
During programming, your
hand-held transmitter may
automatically stop transmitting —
not allowing enough time for
HomeLink to accept the signal
from the hand-held transmitter.
After completing steps 1 and 2
outlined in the “Programming”
section, replace step 3 with the
following:
Note: If programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is
advised to unplug the device during the “cycling” process to prevent
overheating.
• Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button (note step 3 in the
“Programming” section) while you press and release — every two
seconds (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until the frequency
signal has been accepted by the HomeLink. The indicator light will
flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink accepts the radio
frequency signal.
• Proceed with step 4 in the “Programming” section.
Operating the HomeLinkா Wireless Control System
To operate, simply press and release
the appropriate HomeLink button.
Activation will now occur for the
trained product (garage door, gate
operator, security system, entry
door lock, or home or office lighting
etc.). For convenience, the
hand-held transmitter of the device
may also be used at any time. In the
event that there are still
programming difficulties, contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.
70
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Erasing HomeLinkா buttons
To erase the three programmed
buttons (individual buttons cannot
be erased):
• Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink buttons until the
indicator light begins to
flash-after 20 seconds. Release
both buttons. Do not hold for
longer that 30 seconds.
HomeLink is now in the train (or
learning) mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with step
2 in the “Programming” section.
Reprogramming a single HomeLinkா button
To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink button previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. Do NOT release the
button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without
releasing the HomeLink button, follow step 2 in the “Programming”
section.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com
or 1–800–355–3515.
ELECTRONIC MESSAGE CENTER (IF EQUIPPED)
The electronic message center only
works when the ignition is in the
ON position.
CHECK AIR SUSPENSION
OVERDRIVE OFF
DOOR
AJAR
LOW
km
MILES
/GAL
WASHER
FLUID
The message center allows you to:
• see problems such as door ajar,
air suspension, trunk ajar, washer
fluid low
TRUNK AJAR
LTR/100 km
DISTANCE
TO EMPTY
AVG FUEL
ECONOMY
TRIP
A
TRIP
B
AVG
• see how many kilometers/miles
you can drive before running out
of fuel
SPEED
• see when overdrive has been deactivated
• monitor the average fuel economy
71
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
• check the distance traveled during a trip on either Trip A or Trip B
• monitor the average speed
Selectable features
Reset
Press this control to reset the
RESET
E/M
SELECT
selected message center function to
zero. The only functions which can
be reset are:
• AVG ECON
• TRIP A or TRIP B
• AVG SPEED
E/M
Press this control to switch the
electronic instrument cluster display
and the message center display from
metric to English units.
RESET
E/M
SELECT
Select
Each press of the SELECT control
will select a different function.
RESET
E/M
SELECT
• Press the right side of the control
to advance the function to the
right.
• Press the left side of the control
to advance the function to the
left.
To reset any function:
1. Push either the right or left side of the SELECT control to choose the
desired function.
72
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
2. Press the RESET control and the
selected message center function
will be reset to zero.
RESET
E/M
SELECT
Message center functions
DISTANCE TO EMPTY (DTE)
This function estimates
DISTANCE
TO EMPTY
AVG FUEL
ECONOMY
approximately how far you can drive
with the fuel remaining in your tank
under normal driving conditions.
Remember to turn the ignition OFF
TRIP
A
TRIP
B
AVG
SPEED
when refueling to allow this feature to correctly detect the added fuel.
The DTE function will flash for 5 seconds and sound a tone for 1 second
when you have approximately:
• 50 miles (80 km) left before you run out of fuel
• 25 miles (40 km )
• 10 miles (16 km)
The message center will remain in
RESET
E/M
SELECT
the DTE function until the SELECT
control is pressed to change
functions.
DTE is calculated using a running
average fuel economy, which is
based on your recent driving history
of 500 miles (800 km). This value is
not the same as the average fuel
economy display. The running average fuel economy is reinitialized to a
factory default value if the battery is disconnected.
If “CO” or “CS” is displayed, there is a problem with the fuel indication
system and you should contact your dealer for service as soon as
possible.
73
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
AVG FUEL ECONOMY (average fuel economy)
Select this function to display your
average fuel economy in miles/gallon
or liters/100 km.
DISTANCE
TO EMPTY
AVG FUEL
ECONOMY
TRIP
A
TRIP
B
AVG
SPEED
If you calculate your average fuel
economy by dividing miles traveled by gallons used, your figure may be
different than displayed for the following reasons:
• your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill-up
• differences in the automatic shut-off points on the fuel pumps at
service stations
• variations in top-off procedure from one fill-up to another
• rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0.1 gallons (liter)
Press the RESET control while AVG
RESET
E/M
SELECT
ECON is displayed to reset the
function.
The average displayed is the average
since the last reset.
TRIP A and TRIP B
These two functions allow you to
see how far you have traveled since
you last reset. Trip A and Trip B are
completely independent and must
be reset individually.
DISTANCE
TO EMPTY
AVG FUEL
ECONOMY
TRIP
A
TRIP
B
AVG
SPEED
DISTANCE
TO EMPTY
AVG FUEL
ECONOMY
TRIP
A
TRIP
B
AVG
SPEED
74
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
To reset either trip feature to zero,
press the RESET control while the
appropriate trip distance feature
(TRIP A or TRIP B) is displayed.
RESET
E/M
SELECT
AVG SPEED (average speed)
Select this function to display your
average speed in miles per hour or
kilometers per hour.
DISTANCE
TO EMPTY
AVG FUEL
ECONOMY
TRIP
A
TRIP
B
AVG
SPEED
Your vehicle must be moving to
calculate your average speed. When your vehicle is not moving, the
average speed is displayed at 0 miles (0 kilometers) per hour.
INTERIOR TRUNK CONTROL
The remote trunk release control is
located on the driver’s door trim
panel and can be operated at any
time.
You can render the switch
inoperable by locking the button
with your master key.
CELL PHONE USE
The use of Mobile Communications Equipment has become increasingly
important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However,
drivers must not compromise their own or others’ safety when using
such equipment. Mobile Communications can enhance personal safety
and security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency
situations. Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications
equipment to avoid negating these benefits.
Mobile Communication Equipment includes, but is not limited to cellular
phones, pagers, portable email devices, in vehicle communications
systems, telematics devices and portable two-way radios.
75
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
A driver’s first responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle.
The most important thing you can do to prevent a crash is to
avoid distractions and pay attention to the road. Wait until it is safe to
operate Mobile Communications Equipment.
CENTER CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a variety of console features. These
include:
• Utility compartment
• Power point (inside storage bin)
• Cupholders
• Air vents to the rear seating positions (heat only)
Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hard objects can injure you
in a collision.
POSITIVE RETENTION FLOOR MAT
Position the driver floor mat so that
the eyelet is over the pointed end of
the retention post and rotate
forward to lock in. Make sure that
the mat does not interfere with the
operation of the accelerator or the
brake pedal. To remove the floor
mat, reverse the installation
procedure.
76
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
Locks and Security
KEYS
The vehicle is equipped with a master (black) key and valet (gray) key
lock system. The master key will access doors, trunk, glove box, ignition
and remote trunk release. The valet key will access doors and ignition
only. Before using this key, lock the trunk remote control to disable the
Trunk remote control on the drivers door, then lock the glove
compartment with your master key.
POWER DOOR LOCKS
Press control to unlock all vehicle
doors.
Press control to lock all vehicle
doors.
Smart locks (if equipped)
With the key in any ignition position, and either the driver’s or
passenger’s door open, the doors cannot be locked using the power door
lock switches.
The vehicle may still be locked with the key in the ignition, and
performing one of the following actions:
• Pressing the manual lock button on the door.
• Operating the remote entry transmitter (if equipped).
• Operating the keyless entry keypad (if equipped).
• Operating the driver’s door with a key.
77
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
Childproof door locks
When these locks are set, the rear
doors cannot be opened from the
inside. The rear doors can be
opened from the outside when the
doors are unlocked.
The childproof locks are located on
rear edge of each rear door and
must be set separately for each
door. Setting the lock for one door
will not automatically set the lock
for both doors.
Move lock control up to engage the
childproof lock. Move control down
to disengage childproof locks.
INTERIOR LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT RELEASE
Your vehicle is equipped with a mechanical interior luggage compartment
release handle that provides a means of escape for children and adults in
the event they become locked inside the luggage compartment.
Adults are advised to familiarize themselves with the operation and
location of the release handle.
To open the luggage compartment
door (lid) from within the luggage
compartment, pull the illuminated
“T” shaped handle and push up on
the trunk lid. The handle is
composed of a material that will
glow for hours in darkness following
brief exposure to ambient light.
The “T” shaped handle will be
located either on the luggage
compartment door (lid) or inside
the luggage compartment near the
tail lamps.
78
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
Keep vehicle doors and
luggage compartment
locked and keep keys and remote
transmitters out of a child’s reach.
Unsupervised children could lock
themselves in the trunk and risk
injury. Children should be taught
not to play in vehicles.
On hot days, the temperature in the trunk or vehicle interior can
rise very quickly. Exposure of people or animals to these high
temperatures for even a short time can cause death or serious
heat-related injuries, including brain damage. Small children are
particularly at risk.
REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
79
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
The remote entry system allows you to lock or unlock all vehicle doors
without a key.
The remote entry features operate
with the ignition in any position,
except in the 3 (ON) , with the
transmission not in either P (Park)
or N (Neutral).
If there is any potential remote
keyless entry problem with your
vehicle, ensure ALL remote entry
transmitters are brought to the
dealership, to aid in troubleshooting.
Unlocking the doors
1. Press
and release to unlock the driver’s door. Note: The interior
lamps will illuminate.
2. Press
and release again within five seconds to unlock all the doors.
Locking the doors
Press
once to lock all the doors. The doors will lock upon first press.
Press
again within three seconds to receive confirmation that the
vehicle was successfully locked. Note: If all vehicle doors are closed
upon the second press of the , the horn will chirp once and the
parklamps/taillamps will flash once to confirm the successful locking.
Upon the second press of the , if any door is not securely closed the
horn will chirp twice and the park/taillamps will flash twice to warn that
successfully locking was not complete.
Deactivating/activating the horn chirp and flash confirmation
feature
The horn chirp and flash confirmation feature can be turned on/off
through the following procedure using the power door locks:
Complete Steps 1-7 within 30 seconds or you must repeat the procedure.
Wait 30 seconds before repeating the procedure.
1. Turn the ignition to the 3 (ON) position.
2. Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times.
3. Cycle the ignition from the 3 (ON) to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position.
80
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
4. Press the power door unlock control three times.
5. Turn the ignition to the 3 (ON) position. The doors will lock and
unlock.
6. With the ignition still in the 3 (ON) position, press the unlock control
twice.
7. After a five to ten second delay, the door locks will cycle lock/unlock
to confirm successful programming.
8. After having waited the necessary time for the programming to
confirm, turn the ignition to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position.
Sounding a panic alarm
Press
on the remote transmitter to activate the alarm. Note: The
panic alarm only works with the ignition in the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position.
Press a second time to deactivate the alarm. You may also
deactivate the alarm by turning the ignition to the 2 (ACCESSORY) or 3
(ON) position.
Opening the trunk
Press
once to open the trunk.
• Ensure that the trunk is closed and latched before driving your
vehicle. Failure to properly latch the trunk may cause objects to fall
out or block the driver’s rear view.
This feature will not work with the transmission out of P (Park) or N
(Neutral) if the ignition is in either the 2 (ACC) or 3 (ON) position.
Replacing the battery
The remote entry transmitter uses one coin type three-volt lithium
battery CR2032 or equivalent.
81
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
To replace the battery:
1. Twist a thin coin between the two
halves of the remote entry
transmitter near the key ring. DO
NOT TAKE THE RUBBER COVER
AND CIRCUIT BOARD OFF THE
FRONT HOUSING OF THE
REMOTE ENTRY TRANSMITTER.
2. Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals on the back
surface of the circuit board.
3. Remove the old battery. Note: Please refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
4. Insert the new battery. Refer to the diagram inside the remote entry
transmitter for the correct orientation of the battery. Press the battery
down to ensure that the battery is fully seated in the battery housing
cavity.
5. Snap the two halves back together.
Note: Replacement of the battery will not cause the remote transmitter
to become deprogrammed from your vehicle. The remote transmitter
should operate normally after battery replacement.
Replacing lost transmitters
Take all your vehicle’s transmitters to your dealer if service is required.
If a remote transmitter has been lost and you would like to remove it
from the vehicle’s memory, or you would like to purchase additional
remote transmitters and have them programmed to your vehicle:
• Take all your vehicle’s transmitters to your dealer for programming, or
• Perform the following programming procedure yourself:
82
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
Place the key in the ignition and
cycle from 1 (OFF/LOCK) to 3 (ON)
eight times in rapid succession
within 10 seconds. After doors
3
2
lock/unlock, press any control on all
transmitters (up to four). After
pressing the control on each remote
transmitter, the door will lock and
unlock. If programming multiple
remote transmitters, you must press
4
1
the control buttons on each remote transmitter within 7 seconds of each
other to remain in programming mode. When completed, turn the
ignition to 1 (OFF/LOCK).
All transmitters must be programmed at the same time.
• When completed, turn the ignition to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position and
wait at least 20 seconds in order to use the recently programmed
transmitter(s).
• All transmitters must be programmed during the same programming
cycle. A transmitter that is not programmed within the same
programming cycle will be erased and will no longer operate your
vehicle’s locks. If this occurs, you will have to reprogram all the
transmitters again, as you cannot just “add” a transmitter.
Illuminated entry
The interior lamps illuminate when the remote entry system is used to
unlock the door(s) or sound the personal alarm.
The illuminated entry system will turn off the interior lights if:
• the ignition switch is turned to the 2 (ACCESSORY) or 4 (START)
positions, or
• the remote transmitter unlock control is pressed, or
• after 25 seconds of illumination.
The dome lamp control must not be set to the off position for the
illuminated entry system to operate.
The inside lights will not turn off if:
• they have been turned on with the dimmer control, or
• any door is open.
The battery saver will shut off the interior lamps 30 minutes after the
last door is closed, or after 10 minutes if the last door is left open.
83
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
Autolock (if equipped)
This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when:
• all doors are closed,
• the ignition is in the 3 (ON) position,
• the brake pedal is depressed,
• you shift into any gear.
Relock
The autolock feature repeats when:
• the ignition is in the 3 (ON) position,
• a door is opened and closed,
• the transmission is placed in R (Reverse) or any drive gear, and then
• the brake pedal is depressed and then released.
Deactivating/activating the autolock feature
Before following the procedure, make sure that the ignition is in the 3
(OFF) position and all vehicle doors are closed.
Automatic door locks can also be turned on/off through the following
procedure:
You must complete Steps 1-7 within 30 seconds or the procedure will
have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be repeated, you must
wait at least 30 seconds.
1. Turn the ignition to the 3 (ON) position.
2. Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times.
3. Turn the ignition from the 3 (ON) to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position.
4. Press the power door unlock control three times.
5. Turn the ignition back to the 3 (ON) position.
6. The door locks will lock/unlock to confirm programming mode is
entered/active.
7. With the ignition still in the 3 (ON) position, press the unlock control
once. After a five to ten second delay, the door will lock/unlock to
confirm successful programming.
8. After having waited the necessary time for the programming to
confirm, turn the ignition to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position.
Once disabled, the autolock feature can be enabled by repeating the
procedure in Steps 1–8.
84
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
With the keyless entry keypad, you
can:
3
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
0
9
• lock or unlock the vehicle doors
without using the key.
• open the trunk.
See also Remote entry system in this chapter for more information.
Your vehicle has a factory-set 5–digit code that operates the keyless
entry system. You can also program your own 5–digit personal entry
code.
The factory-set code is located:
• On the owner’s wallet card in the glove compartment,
• Taped to the computer module, or
• At your dealer.
When using the keyless entry keypad, press the middle of each button in
order to ensure a good activation.
Programming a personal entry code
You can program up to three personal codes to unlock your vehicle.
These codes do not replace the permanent code that the dealership gave
you.
To create your own personal entry code:
1. Enter the factory set code. Note: The keypad will illuminate when
pressed.
2. Within five seconds press 1 • 2 on the keypad to enter the
programming mode.
3. Enter your personal 5-digit code. Each number must be entered
within five seconds of each other.
4. Press 1 • 2 to store the first personal code.
5. The doors will lock then unlock to confirm programming of the new
code.
To store a second personal code:
1. Enter the factory set code.
2. Within five seconds press 1 • 2 on the keypad to enter the
programming mode.
85
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
3. Enter a second personal 5-digit code. Each number must be entered
within five seconds of each other.
4. Press 3 • 4 to store the second personal code.
5. The doors will again lock then unlock to confirm programming of the
new code.
To store a third personal code:
1. Enter the factory set code.
2. Within five seconds press 1 • 2 on the keypad to enter the
programming mode.
3. Enter a third personal 5-digit code. Each number must be entered
within five seconds of each other.
4. Press 5 • 6 (or 7 • 8, or 9 • 0, or wait five seconds) to store the third
personal code.
5. The doors will again lock then unlock to confirm programming of the
new code.
Tips:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential order.
• The factory set code will work even if you have set your own personal
code.
• If you set a second personal code it will erase your first personal code.
Erasing personal code
To erase all of the personal entry codes programmed to a vehicle:
1. Enter the factory-set code.
2. Press and release 1 • 2 within 5 seconds of step 1.
3. Press and hold 1 • 2 for two seconds. All of the vehicle doors will lock
and then unlock to confirm erasure.
Unlocking the doors and releasing the trunk with the keyless entry
system
To unlock the driver door, enter either the factory-set code or personal
code (each digit pressed within 5 seconds of prior digit). The interior
lamps will illuminate.
• To unlock all doors, enter the factory-set code or personal code
(driver door unlocks) and press 3 • 4 within five seconds.
86
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
• To release the trunk, enter the factory-set code or personal code
(driver door unlocks) and press 5 • 6 within five seconds.
After the factory-set code or personal code has been entered, you can
unlock all doors (press 3 • 4) and release the trunk (press 5 • 6) as
long as the controls are pressed within 5 seconds of each other.
Locking doors with the keyless entry system
It is not necessary to enter the factory-set code prior to locking all doors.
To lock the doors, press 7 • 8 and press 9 • 0 at the same time.
SECURILOCKி PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is an engine immobilization
system. This system is designed to help prevent the engine from being
started unless a coded key programmed to your vehicle is used. The
use of the wrong type of coded key may lead to a “no-start” condition.
Your vehicle comes with two coded keys (or three, if your vehicle is
equipped with the valet feature); additional coded keys may be
purchased from your dealer. The dealer can program your spare keys to
your vehicle or you can program the keys yourself. Refer to
Programming spare keys for instructions on how to program the coded
key.
Note: The SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection.
Note: Large metallic objects, electronic devices that are used to
purchase gasoline or similar items, or a second coded key on the same
key chain may cause vehicle starting issues. You need to prevent these
objects from touching the coded key while starting the engine. These
objects will not cause damage to the coded key, but may cause a
momentary issue if they are too close to the key when starting the
engine. If a problem occurs, turn the ignition to the 1 (OFF/LOCK)
position, remove all objects on the key chain away from the coded key
and restart the engine.
Theft indicator
The theft indicator is the flashing red indicator located on the dash
panel.
• When the ignition is in the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position, the indicator will
flash once every 2 seconds to indicate the SecuriLock system is
functioning as a theft deterrent.
87
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
• When the ignition is in the 3 (ON) position, the indicator will glow for
3 seconds to indicate normal system functionality.
If a problem occurs with the SecuriLock system, the indicator will flash
rapidly or glow steadily when the ignition is in the 3 (ON) position. If
this occurs, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer for
service.
Automatic arming
The vehicle is armed immediately
3
after switching the ignition to the 1
(OFF/LOCK) position.
2
The theft indicator on the
4
instrument panel will flash every
two seconds when the vehicle is
armed.
1
Automatic disarming
Switching the ignition to the 3 (ON) position with a coded key disarms
the vehicle.
• The theft indicator on the instrument panel will illuminate for three
seconds and then go out.
• If the theft indicator stays on for an extended period of time or
flashes rapidly, have the system serviced by your dealer.
Replacement keys
If your keys are lost or stolen and you don’t have an extra coded key,
you will need to have your vehicle towed to a dealership. The key codes
need to be erased from your vehicle and new coded keys will need to be
programmed.
Replacing coded keys can be very costly. Store an extra programmed key
away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any
inconveniences. Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additional
spare or replacement keys.
Programming spare keys
A maximum of eight keys can be coded to your vehicle. Only
SecuriLock keys can be used. To program a coded key yourself, you
88
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
will need two previously programmed coded keys (keys that already
operate your vehicle’s engine) and the new unprogrammed key(s) readily
accessible for timely implementation of each step in the procedure.
If two previously programmed coded keys are not available, you must
bring your vehicle to your dealership to have the spare coded key(s)
programmed.
Please read and understand the entire procedure before you begin.
1. Insert the first previously
3
programmed coded key into the
ignition and turn the ignition from 1
(OFF/LOCK) to the 3 (ON) position
2
(maintain ignition in 3 (ON) for at
least one second).
4
2. Turn ignition to 1 (OFF/LOCK)
and remove the first coded key
from the ignition.
1
3. Within ten seconds of removing
the first coded key, insert the second previously programmed coded
key into the ignition and turn the ignition from 1 (OFF/LOCK) to the 3
(ON) position (maintain ignition in 3 (ON) for at least one second but no
more than ten seconds).
4. Turn the ignition to 1 (OFF/LOCK) and remove the second coded key
from the ignition.
5. Within twenty seconds of removing the second coded key, insert the
new unprogrammed key (new key) into the ignition and turn the ignition
from 1 (OFF/LOCK) to the 3 (ON) position (maintain ignition in 3 (ON)
for at least one second). This step will program your new key.
6. To program additional new unprogrammed key(s), wait at least 20
seconds and repeat this procedure from Step 1.
If successful, the new coded key(s) will start the vehicle’s engine and the
theft indicator will illuminate for three seconds and then go out.
If not successful, the new coded key(s) will not start the vehicle’s engine
and the theft indicator will flash on and off. You may repeat Steps 1
through 6. If failure repeats, bring your vehicle to your dealership to
have the new spare key(s) programmed.
89
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Seating and Safety Restraints
SEATING
Adjustable head restraints
Your vehicle’s seats are equipped with head restraints which are
vertically adjustable. The purpose of these head restraints is to help limit
head motion in the event of a rear collision. To properly adjust your head
restraints, lift the head restraint so that it is located directly behind your
head or as close to that position as possible. Refer to the following to
raise and lower the head restraints.
The head restraints can be moved
up and down.
Push control to lower head restraint.
Adjusting the front manual seat (if equipped)
Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the vehicle is
moving.
Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
90
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Lift handle to move seat forward or
backward.
Pull lever up to adjust seatback.
Using the manual recline function (if equipped)
Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the vehicle is
moving.
Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to avoid injuring
people in a collision or sudden stop.
Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the
seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the
event of a collision.
91
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
To adjust the front seatback using
the manual recliner:
• Lift and hold the handle located
on the side of the seat.
• Lean against the seatback to
adjust it to your desired position.
You can recline the seat back or
bring it forward.
• Release the handle when the desired position has been reached.
Using the power lumbar support (if equipped)
The power lumbar control is located
on the outboard side of the seat.
Press one side of the control to
adjust firmness.
Press the other side of the control to adjust softness.
Heated seats (if equipped)
To operate the heated seats:
• Push the indicated side of the
control for maximum heat.
• Push again to deactivate.
• Push the indicated side of the
control for minimum heat.
• Push again to deactivate.
The heated seat module resets at every ignition run cycle. While the
ignition is in the ON position, activating the high or low heated seat
switch enables heating mode. When activated, they will turn off
automatically when the ignition is turned to the OFF position.
The indicator light will illuminate when the heated seats have been
activated.
92
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Adjusting the power front seats – door mounted controls
(if equipped)
The controls for the power seats are located on the inside of each front
door.
Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the vehicle is
moving.
Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to avoid injuring
people in a collision or sudden stop.
Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the
seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the
event of a collision.
Press the control to recline the
seatback forward or backward.
93
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Press to move the seat forward or
backward.
Press to move the front portion of
the seat cushion up or down.
Press to move the rear portion of
the seat cushion up or down.
94
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Seat mounted cup holders and armrest storage compartment
(if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with cup
holders in the rear seat armrest. To
access the cup holders, rotate
armrest into use position.
Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hard objects can injure you
in a collision.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS
Personal Safety System
The Personal Safety System provides an improved overall level of frontal
crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help further
reduce the risk of air bag-related injuries. The system is able to analyze
different occupant conditions and crash severity before activating the
appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of occupants in
a variety of frontal crash situations.
Your vehicle’s Personal Safety System consists of the following items:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage air bag supplemental restraints
• Driver and front passenger side air bags (if equipped)
• Front safety belts with pretensioners, energy management retractors,
and safety belt usage sensors
• Driver’s seat position sensor
• Front crash severity sensor
• Passenger sensing system
• Restraints Control Module (RCM) with impact and safing sensors
• Restraint system warning light and back-up tone
• The electrical wiring for the air bags, crash sensor(s), safety belt
pretensioners, front safety belt usage sensors, driver seat position
sensor, and indicator lights
95
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
How does the Personal Safety System work?
The Personal Safety System can adapt the deployment strategy of your
vehicle’s safety devices according to crash severity and occupant
conditions. A collection of crash and occupant sensors provides
information to the Restraints control module (RCM). During a crash, the
RCM activates the safety belt pretensioners and/or either one or both
stages of the dual-stage air bag supplemental restraints based on crash
severity and occupant conditions.
The fact that the pretensioners or air bags did not activate for both front
seat occupants in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with
the system. Rather, it means the Personal Safety System determined the
accident conditions (crash severity, belt usage, etc.) were not
appropriate to activate these safety devices. Front air bags and
pretensioners are designed to activate only in frontal and near-frontal
collisions, not rollovers, side-impacts, or rear-impacts unless the collision
causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration.
Driver and passenger dual-stage air bag supplemental restraints
The dual-stage air bags offer the capability to tailor the level of air bag
inflation energy. A lower, less forceful energy level is provided for more
common, moderate-severity impacts. A higher energy level is used for
the most severe impacts. Refer to Air bag supplemental restraints
section in this chapter.
Front crash severity sensor
The front crash severity sensor enhances the ability to detect the
severity of an impact. Positioned up front, it provides valuable
information early in the crash event on the severity of the impact. This
allows your Personal Safety System to distinguish between different
levels of crash severity and modify the deployment strategy of the
dual-stage air bags and safety belt pretensioners.
Driver’s seat position sensor
The driver’s seat position sensor allows your Personal Safety System to
tailor the deployment level of the driver dual-stage air bag based on seat
position. The system is designed to help protect smaller drivers sitting
close to the driver air bag by providing a lower air bag output level.
96
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Front passenger sensing system
For air bags to do their job they must inflate with great force, and this
force can pose a potentially deadly risk to occupants that are very close
to the air bag when it begins to inflate. For some occupants, like infants
in rear-facing child seats, this occurs because they are initially sitting
very close to the air bag. For other occupants, this occurs when the
occupant is not properly restrained by seat belts or child safety seats and
they move forward during pre-crash braking. The most effective way to
reduce the risk of unnecessary injuries is to make sure all occupants are
properly restrained. Accident statistics suggest that children are much
safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the
front.
Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a
rear-facing child seat in front of an active air bag. If you must
use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat all the
way back.
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back
seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.
The front passenger sensing system can automatically turn off the front
passenger front air bag. The system is designed to help protect small
(child size) occupants from air bag deployments when they are
improperly seated or restrained in the front passenger seat contrary to
proper child-seating or restraint usage recommendations. Even with this
technology, parents are STRONGLY encouraged to always properly
restrain children in the rear seat. The sensor also turns off the air bag
when the passenger seat is empty to prevent unnecessary replacement of
the air bag(s) after a collision.
When the front passenger seat is occupied and the sensing system has
turned off the passenger’s frontal air bag, the “pass air bag off” indicator
will light and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal air
bag is off. See Front passenger sensing system in the airbags section of
this chapter.
Front safety belt usage sensors
The front safety belt usage sensors detect whether or not the driver and
front outboard passenger safety belts are fastened. This information
allows your Personal Safety System to tailor the air bag deployment and
safety belt pretensioner activation depending upon safety belt usage.
Refer to Safety belt section in this chapter.
97
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Front safety belt pretensioners
The safety belt pretensioners at the front outboard seating positions are
designed to tighten the safety belts firmly against the occupant’s body
during a frontal or near-frontal collision. This maximizes the effectiveness
of the safety belts and helps properly position the occupant relative to
the air bag to improve protection. The safety belt pretensioners can be
either activated alone or, if the collision is of sufficient severity, together
with the air bags.
Front safety belt energy management retractors
The front outboard safety belt energy management retractors allow
webbing to be pulled out of the retractor in a gradual and controlled
manner in response to the occupant’s forward momentum. This helps
reduce the risk of force-related injuries to the occupant’s chest by
limiting the load on the occupant. Refer to Energy management feature
section in this chapter.
Determining if the Personal Safety System is operational
The Personal Safety System uses a warning light in the instrument
cluster or a back-up tone to indicate the condition of the system. Refer
to the Warning light section in the Instrument cluster chapter. Routine
maintenance of the Personal Safety System is not required.
The Restraints control module (RCM) monitors its own internal circuits
and the circuits for the air bag supplemental restraints, crash sensor(s),
safety belt pretensioners, front safety belt buckle sensors, and the driver
seat position sensor. In addition, the RCM also monitors the restraints
warning light in the instrument cluster. A difficulty with the system is
indicated by one or more of the following.
• The warning light will either flash or stay lit.
• The warning light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and warning light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the Personal
Safety System serviced at your dealership or by a qualified technician
immediately. Unless serviced, the system may not function properly in
the event of a collision.
98
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Safety restraints precautions
Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit in the back
seat where they can be properly restrained.
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from
injury in a collision.
All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag
supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a safety belt.
Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt
assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that
are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the
outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm. 2)
Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside shoulder.
3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back
seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.
99
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle that has been
closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a small child. Check
seat covers and buckles before you place a child anywhere near them.
Combination lap and shoulder belts
1. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) until you hear a snap and feel
it latch. Make sure the tongue is
securely fastened in the buckle.
2. To unfasten, push the release
button and remove the tongue from
the buckle.
Energy management feature
• This vehicle has a seat belt system with an energy management
feature at the front outboard seating positions to help further reduce
the risk of injury in the event of a head-on collision.
• This seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to pay
out webbing in a controlled manner. This feature is designed to help
reduce the belt force acting on the occupant’s chest.
The front outboard and rear safety restraints in the vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts. The front outboard passenger and
rear seat safety belts have three types of locking modes described below:
Vehicle sensitive mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle
100
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce
forward movement of the driver and passengers.
Webbing extraction sensitive mode
The webbing sensitive locking mode locks the webbing and prevents
more belt from being pulled out if the belt is pulled out too quickly. The
belt will unlock when you stop pulling on it.
Automatic locking mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is pre-locked. The belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt.
When to use the automatic locking mode
• Any time a child safety seat is installed in a passenger front outboard
or any rear seating position. Children 12 years old and under should
be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible. Refer to
Safety Restraints for Children or Safety Seats for Children later in
this chapter.
How to use the automatic locking mode
• Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
101
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
• Grasp the shoulder portion and
pull downward until the entire
belt is pulled out.
• Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking
mode.
How to disengage the automatic locking mode
Ford Motor Company recommends that all passenger safety belt
assemblies and attaching hardware should be inspected by a
qualified technician after any collision to verify that the Љautomatic
locking retractorЉ feature for child seats is still working properly. Safety
belt assemblies should be inspected according to the procedures in the
Workshop Manual and must be replaced if either damage or improper
operation is noted. Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in a collision.
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
Front safety belt height adjustment
Your vehicle has safety belt height
adjustments for the driver and front
outboard passenger. Adjust the
height of the shoulder belt so the
belt rests across the middle of your
shoulder.
To lower the shoulder belt height,
push the button and slide the height
adjuster down. To raise the height
of the shoulder belt, push the
button and slide the height adjuster
up. Pull down on the height adjuster to make sure it is locked in place.
102
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust the safety
belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and
increase the risk of injury in a collision.
Lap belts
Adjusting the front center seat lap belt
The lap belt should fit snugly and as low as possible around the
hips, not across the waist.
The lap belt does not adjust
automatically. Insert the tongue into
the correct buckle (the buckle
closest to the direction the tongue is
coming from). To lengthen the belt,
turn the tongue at a right angle to
the belt and pull across your lap
until it reaches the buckle. To
tighten the belt, pull the loose end
of the belt through the tongue until
it fits snugly across the hips.
Shorten and fasten the belt when
not in use.
103
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Safety belt warning light and indicator chime
The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a
chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts.
Conditions of operation
If...
Then...
The driver’s safety belt is not
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the ON
position...
The safety belt warning light
illuminates 1-2 minutes and the
warning chime sounds 4-8 seconds.
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled while the indicator
light is illuminated and the
warning chime is sounding...
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the ON
position...
The safety belt warning light and
warning chime turn off.
The safety belt warning light and
indicator chime remain off.
BeltMinder
The BeltMinder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt
warning function. This feature provides additional reminders by
intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning
lamp in the instrument cluster when the driver’s and front passenger’s
safety belt is unbuckled.
The BeltMinder feature uses information from the passenger occupant
classification sensor to determine if a front seat passenger is present and
therefore potentially in need of a warning. To avoid activating the
BeltMinder feature for objects placed in the front passenger seat,
warnings will only be given to large front seat occupants as determined
by the passenger occupant classification sensor.
Both the driver’s and passenger’s safety belt usages are monitored and
either may activate the BeltMinder feature. The warnings are the same
for the driver and the front passenger. If the BeltMinder warnings have
expired (warnings for approximately 5 minutes) for one occupant (driver
or front passenger), the other occupant can still activate the BeltMinder
feature.
104
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
If...
Then...
The driver’s and front
passenger’s safety belts are
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the ON
position or less than 1-2
The BeltMinder feature will not
activate.
minutes have elapsed since the
ignition switch has been turned
ON...
The driver’s or front
The BeltMinder feature is activated -
the safety belt warning light
illuminates and the warning chime
sounds for 6 seconds every 30
seconds, repeating for approximately
5 minutes or until the safety belts are
buckled.
passenger’s safety belt is not
buckled when the vehicle has
reached at least 3 mph (5
km/h) and 1-2 minutes have
elapsed since the ignition
switch has been turned to
ON...
The driver’s or front
The BeltMinder feature is activated -
passenger’s safety belt becomes the safety belt warning light
unbuckled for approximately 1 illuminates and the warning chime
minute while the vehicle is
traveling at least 3 mph (5
km/h) and more than 1-2
sounds for 6 seconds every 30
seconds, repeating for approximately
5 minutes or until the safety belts are
minutes have elapsed since the buckled.
ignition switch has been turned
to ON...
105
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts:
(All statistics based on U.S. data)
Reasons given...
Consider...
“Crashes are rare events”
36700 crashes occur every day. The
more we drive, the more we are
exposed to “rare” events, even for
good drivers. 1 in 4 of us will be
seriously injured in a crash during
our lifetime.
“I’m not going far”
3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25
miles (40 km) of home.
“Belts are uncomfortable”
We design our safety belts to enhance
comfort. If you are uncomfortable -
try different positions for the safety
belt upper anchorage and seatback
which should be as upright as
possible; this can improve comfort.
Prime time for an accident.
BeltMinder reminds us to take a few
seconds to buckle up.
“I was in a hurry”
“Safety belts don’t work”
Safety belts, when used properly,
reduce risk of death to front seat
occupants by 45% in cars, and by
60% in light trucks.
“Traffic is light”
Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in
single-vehicle crashes, many when
no other vehicles are around.
Possibly, but a serious crash can do
much more than wrinkle your clothes,
particularly if you are unbelted.
Set the example, teen deaths occur 4
times more often in vehicles with
TWO or MORE people. Children and
younger brothers/sisters imitate
behavior they see.
“Belts wrinkle my clothes”
“The people I’m with don’t
wear belts”
106
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Reasons given...
Consider...
“I have an air bag”
Air bags offer greater protection when
used with safety belts. Frontal airbags
are not designed to inflate in rear and
side crashes or rollovers.
“I’d rather be thrown clear”
Not a good idea. People who are
ejected are 40 times more likely
to DIE. Safety belts help prevent
ejection, WE CAN’T “PICK OUR
CRASH”.
Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt to avoid the Belt
Minder chime. Sitting on the safety belt will increase the risk of
injury in an accident. To disable (one-time) or deactivate the Belt
Minder feature please follow the directions stated below.
One time disable
If at any time the driver/front passenger quickly buckles then unbuckles
the BeltMinder feature for that seating position, the BeltMinder is
disabled for the current ignition cycle. The BeltMinder feature will
re-enable during the same ignition cycle if the occupant buckles and
remains buckled for approximately 30 seconds. Confirmation is not given
for the one time disable.
Deactivating/activating the BeltMinder feature
The driver and front passenger BeltMinder are
deactivated/activated independently. When deactivating/activating
one seating position, do not buckle the other position as this will
terminate the process.
Read steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before proceeding with the
deactivation/activation programming procedure.
The driver and front passenger BeltMinder features can be
deactivated/activated by performing the following procedure:
Before following the procedure, make sure that:
• The parking brake is set
• The gearshift is in P (Park) (automatic transmission)
• The ignition switch is in the OFF position
• The driver and front passenger safety belts are unbuckled
107
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
To reduce the risk of injury, do not deactivate/activate the Belt
Minder feature while driving the vehicle.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN (or ON) position. (DO NOT
START THE ENGINE)
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off. (Approximately 1
minute)
• Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt
warning light turns off.
3. For the seating position being disabled, buckle then unbuckle the
safety belt 9 times, ending in the unbuckled state. (Step 3 must be
completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt warning light turns
off.)
• After step 3, the restraint system warning light (airbag light) will be
turned on for three seconds.
4. Within 10 seconds of the light turning on, buckle then unbuckle the
safety belt.
• This will disable the BeltMinder feature for that seating position if it is
currently enabled. As confirmation, the restraint system warning light
will flash 4 times per second for 3 seconds.
• This will enable the BeltMinder feature for that seating position if it is
currently disabled. As confirmation, the restraint system warning light
will flash 4 times per second for 3 seconds, followed by 3 seconds with
the light off, then followed by the restraint system warning light
flashing 4 times per second for 3 seconds again.
Safety belt extension assembly
If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, there is a 8 inch
(20 cm) safety belt extension assembly that can be added (part number
611C22). This assembly can be obtained from your dealer at no cost.
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety
belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on
the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too
short for you when fully extended.
Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt
across the torso.
108
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Safety belt maintenance
Inspect the safety belt systems periodically to make sure they work
properly and are not damaged. Inspect the safety belts to make sure
there are no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary. All safety belt
assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle
assemblies, buckle support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder
belt height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback (if
equipped), child safety seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching
hardware, should be inspected after a collision. Ford Motor Company
recommends that all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in
a collision be replaced. However, if the collision was minor and a
qualified technician finds that the belts do not show damage and
continue to operate properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety
belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and
replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the safety belt
assembly under the above conditions could result in severe
personal injuries in the event of a collision.
Refer to Interior in the Cleaning chapter.
AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
109
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Important SRS precautions
The SRS is designed to work with
the safety belt to help protect the
driver and right front passenger
from certain upper body injuries. Air
bags DO NOT inflate slowly; there is
a risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.
All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag
supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back
seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between an occupant’s chest and the driver air bag module.
Never place your arm over the air bag module as a deploying air
bag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries.
Ford Motor Company recommends that a certified technician
inspect all steering column assemblies in use in vehicles involved
in a collision. Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the steering
column assembly could result in severe injury or death in the event of
a collision.
110
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the steering column,
its adaptive module, or its fuses. See your Ford or Lincoln
Mercury dealer.
To properly position yourself away from the air bag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly one or two degrees from the upright position.
Do not put anything on or over the air bag module. Placing
objects on or over the air bag inflation area may cause those
objects to be propelled by the air bag into your face and torso causing
serious injury.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the air bag
supplemental restraint systems or its fuses. See your Ford or
Lincoln Mercury dealer.
The front passenger air bag is not designed to offer protection to
an occupant in the center front seating position.
Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of the vehicle
(including frame, bumper, front end body structure and tow
hooks) may affect the performance of the air bag system, increasing
the risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of the vehicle.
111
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Children and air bags
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics
suggest that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front
seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the
risk of injury in a collision.
Air bags can kill or injure a
child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child
seat in front of an active air bag. If
you must use a forward-facing
child seat in the front seat, move
the seat all the way back.
How does the air bag supplemental restraint system work?
The air bag SRS is designed to
activate when the vehicle sustains
longitudinal deceleration sufficient
to cause the sensors to close an
electrical circuit that initiates air
bag inflation.
The fact that the air bags did not
inflate in a collision does not mean
that something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the forces
were not of the type sufficient to
cause activation. Driver and passenger airbags are designed to inflate in
frontal and near-frontal collisions, not rollover, side-impact, or
rear-impacts unless the collision causes sufficient longitudinal
deceleration.
112
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
The air bags inflate and deflate
rapidly upon activation. After air bag
deployment, it is normal to notice a
smoke-like, powdery residue or
smell the burnt propellant. This may
consist of cornstarch, talcum
powder (to lubricate the bag) or
sodium compounds (e.g., baking
soda) that result from the
combustion process that inflates the
air bag. Small amounts of sodium
hydroxide may be present which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but
none of the residue is toxic.
While the system is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, contact with
a deploying air bag may also cause abrasions, swelling or temporary
hearing loss. Because air bags must inflate rapidly and with considerable
force, there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures,
facial and eye injuries or internal injuries, particularly to occupants who
are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time
of air bag deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be
properly restrained as far away from the air bag module as possible while
maintaining vehicle control.
The SRS consists of the following items:
• Driver and passenger air bag modules (which include the inflators and
air bags)
• Driver and passenger side air bags
• One or more impact and safing sensors
• A readiness light and tone
• A diagnostic module
• The electrical wiring which connects the components
The diagnostic module monitors its own internal circuits as well as the
supplemental air bag electrical system wiring (including the impact
sensors), the system wiring, the air bag system readiness light, the air
bag back up power and the air bag ignitors.
Several air bag system components get hot after inflation. Do not
touch them after inflation.
113
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
If the air bag has deployed, the air bag will not function
again and must be replaced immediately. If the air bag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a
collision.
If the safety belt pretensioners deploy in an accident, they will
not function again ( belt will not extract or retract) and must be
replaced immediately. Failure to replace the retractor assemblies will
increase the risk of injury.
Front passenger sensing system
The front passenger sensing system will turn off the front passenger’s
frontal air bag under certain conditions. The driver’s airbag is not part of
the front passenger sensing system. The front passenger sensing system
works with sensors that are part of the front passenger’s seat and safety
belt. The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a
properly-seated occupant and determine if the front passenger’s frontal
airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to meet the regulatory
requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 208
and is designed to turn off the front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
• the front passenger seat is unoccupied,
• an infant or small child weighing less than 50 pounds (23 kg) is in the
front seat, either in a child restraint, in a booster seat, or sitting
directly on the vehicle seat,
• a front passenger takes his/her weight off the seat for a period of time
For larger children and very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may leave the air bag system enabled, or turn it OFF. The occupant’s
seating position may determine whether or not the air bags are enabled.
Even with the front passenger sensing system, children 12 and
under should be properly restrained in the back seat.
114
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
When the front passenger seat is
occupied and the sensing system
has turned off the passenger’s
frontal airbag, the Љpassenger airbag
offЉ or Љpass airbag offЉ indicator will
light and stay lit to remind you that
the front passenger frontal airbag is off. When the front passenger seat is
not occupied (empty seat) or in the event that the front passenger
frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate), the indicator light will be unlit.
The indicator light is located in the center stack of the instrument panel
to the right of the radio.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the front
passenger’s frontal airbag when a rear facing infant seat, a forward-facing
child restraint, or a booster seat is detected. If the child restraint has
been installed and the indicator is not lit, then turn the vehicle off,
remove the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the restraint
following the child restraint manufacturer’s directions.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable (may inflate)
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag anytime the system senses that
a person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger seat.
When the passenger sensing system has allowed the airbags to be
enabled, the indicator will be unlit and stay unlit to remind you that the
air bag is enabled (may inflate).
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the front passenger’s seat, but the
Љpassenger air bag offЉ or Љpass air bag offЉ indicator is lit, it could be
that the person isn’t sitting properly in the seat. If this happens, turn the
vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the full upright
position, then sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with
the person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart the vehicle and have the
person remain in this position for about two minutes. This will allow the
system to detect that person and then enable the passenger’s air bag. If
the indicator lamp remains lit even after this, then the occupant should
be advised to ride in the back seat.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts, it’s
very important that they continue to sit upright, with their back against
the seatback, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor while the
vehicle is still in motion. Sitting improperly can increase the chance of
injury in a crash event. For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down,
turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or
both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased.
115
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat back reclined
too far can take off weight from the seat cushion and affect the
decision of the passenger sensing system, resulting in serious injury or
death in a crash. Always sit upright against your seatback, with your
feet on the floor.
The front passenger sensing system may detect small or medium objects
placed on the seat cushion. For most objects that are in the front
passenger seat, the passenger airbag will be disabled. Even though the
passenger airbag is disabled, the Љpass airbag offЉ light may or may not
be illuminated according to the table below.
Pass Airbag Off
Indicator Light
Unlit
Passenger Frontal
Airbag
Disabled
Objects
Empty seat
Small (i.e. 3 ring
binder, small purse,
bottled water)
Unlit
Disabled
Medium (i.e. heavy
briefcase, fully packed
luggage)
Empty seat, Small or
medium object with
safety belt buckled
Lit
Lit
Disabled
Disabled
In case there is a problem with the
passenger sensing system, the
airbag readiness light in the
AIR
BAG
instrument cluster will stay lit. DO
NOT attempt to repair or service the system; take your vehicle
immediately to the dealer.
If it is necessary to modify an advanced front air bag system to
accommodate a person with disabilities, contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center at the phone number shown in the Customer
Assistance section of this Owner’s Guide.
Any alteration/modification to the front passenger seat may
affect the performance of the front passenger sensing system.
116
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Determining if the system is operational
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to Air bag readiness section
in the Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the air bag is
not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
• The readiness light will either
AIR
BAG
flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after
ignition is turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced
at your dealership or by a qualified technician immediately. Unless
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a
collision.
Side air bag system (if equipped)
Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the air bag
cover on the side of the seatbacks of the front seats or in front
seat areas that may come into contact with a deploying air bag. Failure
to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in
the event of a collision.
Do not use accessory seat covers. The use of accessory seat
covers may prevent the deployment of the side air bags and
increase the risk of injury in an accident.
Do not lean your head on the door. The side air bag could injure
you as it deploys from the side of the seatback.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the air bag SRS, its
fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an air bag. See your
Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer.
117
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
All occupants of the vehicle should always wear their safety belts
even when an air bag SRS is provided.
How does the side air bag system work?
The design and development of the
side airbag system included
recommended testing procedures
that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as
the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of
side airbags.
The side air bag system consists of
the following:
• An inflatable nylon bag (air bag)
with a gas generator concealed
behind the outboard bolster of
the driver and front passenger
seatbacks.
• A special seat cover designed to allow airbag deployment.
• The same warning light, electronic control and diagnostic unit as used
for the front air bags.
• Two crash sensors located near the side of the vehicle.
Side air bags, in combination with seat belts, can help reduce the risk of
severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact collision.
The side air bags are fitted on the outboard side of the seatbacks of the
front seats. In certain lateral collisions, the air bag on the side affected
by the collision will be inflated. The air bag was designed to inflate
between the door panel and occupant to further enhance the protection
provided occupants in side impact collisions.
The air bag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains lateral
deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an electrical circuit
that initiates air bag inflation.
The fact that the air bags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that
something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the forces were
not of the type sufficient to cause activation. Side air bags are designed
118
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
to inflate in side-impact collisions, not roll-over, rear-impact, frontal or
near-frontal collisions, unless the collision causes sufficient lateral
deceleration.
Several air bag system components get hot after inflation. Do not
touch them after inflation.
If the side air bag has
deployed, the air bag will
not function again. The side
air bag system (including the
seat) must be inspected and
serviced by a qualified
technician in accordance with
the vehicle service manual. If
the air bag is not replaced, the
unrepaired area will increase the
risk of injury in a collision.
Determining if the system is operational
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to the Air bag readiness
section in the Instrument cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the
side air bag is not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
• The readiness light (same light as for front air bag system) will either
flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced
at your dealership or by a qualified technician immediately. Unless
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a
collision.
Disposal of air bags and air bag equipped vehicles (including
pretensioners)
See your local dealership or qualified technician. Air bags MUST BE
disposed of by qualified personnel.
119
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety
restraints for children. Also see Air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using air bags.
Important child restraint precautions
You are required by law to use safety restraints for children in the U.S.
and Canada. If small children (generally children who are four years old
or younger and who weigh 40 lbs[18 kg] or less) ride in your vehicle, you
must put them in safety seats made especially for children. Many states
require that children use approved booster seats until they are eight
years old. Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific
requirements regarding the safety of children in your vehicle. When
possible, always place children under age 12 in the rear seat of your
vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position.
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from
injury in a collision.
Always follow the instructions and warnings that come with any infant or
child restraint you might use.
Children and safety belts
If the child is the proper size, restrain the child in a safety seat.
Children who are too large for child safety seats (as specified by your
child safety seat manufacturer) should always wear safety belts.
Follow all the important safety restraint and air bag precautions that
apply to adult passengers in your vehicle.
If the shoulder belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt can
be positioned so it does not cross or rest in front of the child’s face or
neck, the child should wear the lap and shoulder belt. Moving the child
closer to the center of the vehicle may help provide a good shoulder belt
fit.
Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets unattended in
your vehicle.
120
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Child booster seats
Children outgrow a typical convertible or toddler seat when they weigh
40 pounds (18 kg) and are around 4 years of age. Although the
lap/shoulder belt will provide some protection, these children are still too
small for lap/shoulder belts to fit properly, which could increase the risk
of serious injury.
To improve the fit of both the lap and shoulder belt on children who
have outgrown child safety seats, Ford Motor Company recommends use
of a belt-positioning booster.
Booster seats position a child so that safety belts fit better. They lift the
child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips and the knees
bend comfortably. Booster seats also make the shoulder belt fit better
and more comfortably for growing children.
When children should use booster seats
Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the
toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and
lap/shoulder belt to fit properly. Generally this is when they weigh about
80 lbs (36 kg) (about 8 to 12 years old).
Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these
questions:
• Can the child sit all the way back
against the vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the
edge of the seat without
slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
121
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Types of booster seats
There are two types of belt-positioning booster seats:
• Those that are backless.
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the
shield and use the lap/shoulder
belt. If a seating position has a
low seat back and no head
restraint, a backless booster seat
may place your child’s head (top
of ear level) above the top of the
seat. In this case, move the
backless booster to another
seating position with a higher seat back and lap/shoulder belts.
• Those with a high back.
If, with a backless booster seat,
you cannot find a seating position
that adequately supports your
child’s head, a high back booster
seat would be a better choice.
Both can be used in any vehicle in a seating position equipped with
lap/shoulder belts if your child is over 40 lbs (18 kg).
The shoulder belt should cross the chest, resting snugly on the center of
the shoulder. The lap belt should rest low and snug across the hips,
never up high across the stomach.
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat, placing a rubberized mesh
sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this
condition.
The importance of shoulder belts
Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child’s
head hitting a hard surface in a collision. For this reason, you should
never use a booster seat with a lap belt only. It is best to use a booster
seat with lap/shoulder belts in the back seat- the safest place for children
to ride.
122
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the
booster seat.
Never put the shoulder belt under a child’s arm or behind the
back because it eliminates the protection for the upper part of
the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision.
Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child. They can
slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a
collision.
SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN
Child and infant or child safety seats
Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the
child. Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions with the
safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the
safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or
collision.
When installing a child safety seat:
• Review and follow the information
presented in the Air bag
supplemental restraint system
(SRS) section in this chapter.
• Use the correct safety belt buckle
for that seating position (the
buckle closest to the direction the
tongue is coming from).
• Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle until you hear a
snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the
buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button,
to prevent accidental unbuckling.
• Place seat back in upright position.
• Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to Automatic
locking mode (passenger side front and outboard rear seating
positions) (if equipped) section in this chapter.
123
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
• LATCH lower anchors are recommended for use by children up to 48
pounds (22 kg) in a child restraint. Top tether anchors can be used
for children up to 60 pounds (27 kg) in a child restraint, and to
provide upper torso restraint for children up to 80 pounds (36 kg)
using an upper torso harness and a belt-positioning booster.
Ford recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top tether
strap. Install the child safety seat in a seating position with LATCH and
tether anchors. For more information on top tether straps and anchors,
refer to Attaching safety seats with tether straps in this chapter. For
more information of LATCH anchors refer to Attaching safety seats with
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) attachments in this
chapter.
Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions included
with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install
and use the safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden
stop or collision.
Rear-facing child seats or infant carriers should never be placed
in the front seats.
Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder
belts
Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a
rear-facing child seat in front of an active air bag. If you must
use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat all the
way back.
Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in the rear
seat whenever possible.
124
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
1. Position the child safety seat in a
seat with a combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt
and then grasp the shoulder belt
and lap belt together.
3. While holding the shoulder and
lap belt portions together, route the
tongue through the child seat
according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure
the belt webbing is not twisted.
125
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
4. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) for that seating position until
you hear a snap and feel the latch
engage. Make sure the tongue is
latched securely by pulling on it.
5. To put the retractor in the
automatic locking mode, grasp the
shoulder portion of the belt and pull
downward until all of the belt is
pulled out and a click is heard.
6. Allow the belt to retract. The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it
is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Pull the lap belt portion across
the child seat toward the buckle and
pull up on the shoulder belt while
pushing down with your knee on the
child seat.
126
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
8. Allow the safety belt to retract to
remove any slack in the belt.
9. Before placing the child in the
seat, forcibly move the seat forward
and back to make sure the seat is
securely held in place. To check
this, grab the seat at the belt path
and attempt to move it side to side
and forward. There should be no
more than one inch of movement for
proper installation.
10. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is
in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt
out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat steps
two through nine.
Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use.
Attaching child safety seats with tether straps
Most new forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which
goes over the back of the seat and hooks to an anchoring point. Tether
straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats. Contact
the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a
tether strap.
The rear seats of your vehicle are equipped with built-in tether strap
anchors located behind the seats as described below.
The tether anchors in your vehicle are located under a cover marked
with the tether anchor symbol (shown with title).
The tether strap anchors in your
vehicle are in the following positions
(shown from top view):
Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as
shown. The tether strap may not work properly if attached
somewhere other than the correct tether anchor.
1. Position the child safety seat on the seat cushion.
127
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
2. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat.
For vehicles with adjustable head restraints, route the tether strap under
the head restraint and between the head restraint posts, otherwise route
the tether strap over the top of the seatback.
3. Locate the correct anchor for the
selected seating position.
4. Open the tether anchor cover.
5. Clip the tether strap to the
anchor as shown.
If the tether strap is clipped
incorrectly, the child safety
seat may not be retained properly
in the event of a collision.
6. Install the child safety seat tightly using the LATCH anchors or safety
belts. Follow the instructions in this chapter.
7. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child
being injured in a collision greatly increases.
Attaching safety seats with LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children) attachments
Some child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted attachments
that connect to two anchors at certain seating positions in your vehicle.
128
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
This type of child seat eliminates the need to use seat belts to attach the
child seat. For forward-facing child seats, the tether strap must also be
attached to the proper tether anchor. See Attaching safety seats with
tether straps in this chapter.
Your vehicle has LATCH anchors for child seat installation at the seating
positions marked with the child seat symbol.
The anchors on both sides of the
center of the rear seat are provided
for child seats at the outboard seats,
and are further apart than the pairs
of lower anchors for child seat
installation at other seats. DO NOT
install child seats with LATCH
attachments (rigid or mounted on
belt webbing) to the lower anchors
at the center rear seat. If you install a child seat at the center rear
position, use the vehicle belt and the top tether anchor.
Never attach two LATCH child safety seats to the same anchor.
In a crash, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two
child safety seat attachments and may break, causing serious injury or
death.
Follow the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions to properly install a
child seat with LATCH attachments.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the
anchors shown.
If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments, do not tighten
the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat cushion
when the child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug without
129
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
lifting the front of the child seat. Keeping the child seat just touching the
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash.
Each time you use the safety seat, check that the seat is properly
attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor. Try to tilt the child
seat from side to side. Also try to tug the seat forward. Check to see if
the anchors hold the seat in place.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child
being injured in a crash greatly increases.
130
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Tires, Wheels and Loading
INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
New vehicles are fitted with tires
that have a rating on them called
Tire Quality Grades. The Quality
grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example:
• Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United
States Department of Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic tires for use on passenger
cars. They do not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in
Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.
Department of Transportation requires Ford to give you the following
information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
131
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature A B C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by
law.
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
TIRES
Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service, but they
must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them.
Glossary of tire terminology
• Tire label: A label showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle
can carry.
• Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of
each tire providing information about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture.
• Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.
• Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing
the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s
load carrying capability.
132
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires].
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase
the tire’s load carrying capability.
• kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.
• PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.
• Cold inflation pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 km).
• Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found
on the tire label located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s
door.
• B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the
front door.
• Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.
• Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.
• Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.
• Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated.
INSPECTING AND INFLATING YOUR TIRES
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly
inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure
without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check
your tires. If one looks lower than
the others, use a tire gauge to check
pressure of all tires, and adjust if
required.
At least once a month and before
long trips, inspect each tire and
check the tire pressure with a tire
gauge (including spare). Inflate all
tires to the inflation pressure
recommended by Ford Motor
Company.
133
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Inspecting your tires
Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and
remove stones, nails, glass or other objects that may be wedged in the
tread grooves. Check for holes or cuts that may permit air leakage from
the tire and make necessary repairs.
Also inspect the tire sidewalls for cuts, bruises and other damage. If
internal damage to the tire is suspected, have the tire demounted and
inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced. For your safety,
tires that are damaged should not be used because they are more likely
to blow out or fail. Tires can be damaged during off-road use, so
inspection after off-road use is also recommended.
Inflating your tires
Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation pressure, including the spare,
at least monthly and before long trips. You are strongly urged to buy a
reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic service station gauges may be
inaccurate. Ford recommends the use of a digital or dial type tire
pressure gauge rather than a stick type tire pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause
uneven treadwear patterns.
Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire failures and
may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation or ЉblowoutЉ,
with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury.
Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance,
resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It also may
result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle control
and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not
appear to be flat!
Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure
even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found
on the tire. The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on
the tire label or certification label which is located on the B-Pillar or the
edge of the driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire pressure
recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and adversely
affect the way your vehicle handles.
Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufactures’
maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at which the
maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally
134
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure
which can be found on either the tire label or certification label which is
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The cold inflation
pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on
the tire label or certification label.
When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also
change. A 10° F (6° C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding
drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found
on the tire label or certification label.
If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, (i.e. driven more
than 1 mile [1.6 km]), never “bleed” or reduce air pressure. The tires are
hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold
inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated.
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving
even a mile.
Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check
and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure
when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air
pressure inside to go up as you drive. Never “bleed” or reduce air
pressure when tires are hot.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire
gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in
the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires require higher inflation pressure than the other
tires. Check the tire label on the B pillar or the edge of the driver’s door
for the recommended spare tire pressure.
6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other
objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air
leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.
135
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
TIRE REPLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS
Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the same size
and type (such as P-metric versus LT-metric or all-season versus
all-terrain) as those originally provided by Ford. Use of any tire or
wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
Additionally the use of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause
steering, suspension, axle or transfer case/power transfer unit failure. If
you have questions regarding tire replacement, see an authorized Ford
or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.
Make sure all tires and wheels on the vehicle are of the same size, type,
tread design, brand, load-carrying capacity and speed rating because it
can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could result
in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
You should replace the spare tire when you replace the other road tires
due to the aging of the spare tire.
CHANGING THE TIRES
If you get a flat tire while driving:
• do not brake heavily.
• gradually decrease the vehicle’s speed.
• hold the steering wheel firmly.
• slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.
The use of tire sealants is not recommended and may damage
your tires.
T-Type/Mini-Spare Tire Information
Your vehicle may be equipped with a T-type/mini-spare tire. This tire will
have the words ЉTemporary Use OnlyЉ molded into the tire sidewall. This
spare tire is considered ЉtemporaryЉ. Replace the T-type/mini-spare with
a tire of the same size, speed rating and load carrying capacity as the
other road tires as soon as possible.
136
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
When driving with the T-type/mini-spare tire do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
• Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the
Safety Compliance Label
• Tow a trailer
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the T-type/mini spare
tire
• Use more than one T-type/mini spare tire at a time
• Use commercial car washing equipment
• Try to repair the T-type/mini spare tire
Use of a T-type/mini spare tire at any one wheel location can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information
Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A
dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is
different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If
you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel, then it is intended for temporary
use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should replace it as
soon as possible with a road tire/wheel that is the same size and type as
the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by Ford. If the
dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it should be replaced rather
than repaired.
When driving with the dissimilar spare tire/wheel, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h)
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire/wheel at a time
• Use commercial car washing equipment
137
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire/wheel
The usage of a dissimilar spare tire/wheel can lead to impairment of the
following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
• All-Wheel driving capability (if applicable)
• Load leveling adjustment (if applicable)
When driving with the dissimilar spare tire/wheel additional caution
should be given to:
• Towing a trailer
• Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body
• Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack
Drive cautiously when using a dissimilar spare tire/wheel and seek
service as soon as possible.
Tire change procedure
To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire,
be sure the parking brake is set, then block (in both directions)
the wheel that is diagonally opposite (other side and end of the
vehicle) to the tire being changed.
If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else could be
seriously injured.
138
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
1. Park on a level surface, activate
hazard flashers and set parking
brake.
HOOD
2. Place gearshift lever in P (Park),
turn engine OFF and block the
diagonally opposite wheel.
3. Remove the spare tire and the
jack. The jack could be located:
• A — behind the mini spare tire or
• B — behind the full size spare
tire
On vehicles equipped with
Air Suspension, turn OFF
the Air Suspension switch prior to
jacking, hoisting or towing your
vehicle.
OFF
Refer to Air suspension system in
the Driving chapter of the Owner’s
Guide for more information.
139
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
4. Remove the lug wrench from the
jack. Rotate the lug wrench socket
out from the handle.
A
5. Locate pry off notch (if
equipped) and remove the center
ornament from the aluminum wheel
with the tapered end of the wheel
nut wrench that came with your
vehicle. Insert and twist the handle,
then pry against the wheel.
6. If equipped with a full
wheelcover, remove the wheelcover
center ornament then loosen the five black plastic nuts which retain the
wheelcover using the lug wrench.
7. Loosen each wheel metal lug nut one-half turn counterclockwise but
do not remove them until the wheel is raised off the ground.
Before placing the jack under the vehicle, NOTE the jack location
markings:
JACK LOCATION
B
The jack location markings can be
found on the lower outer edge of
the body.
A
D
C
• Locate the jack locator mark (B)
on the body (C) near the tire you
are changing, then place the jack
(D) under the frame (A) of
the vehicle aligning it with the
mark (B).
140
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Position the jack according to the
following guides and turn the jack
handle clockwise until the wheel
is completely off the ground.
To lessen risk of personal
injury, do not put any part
of your body under the vehicle
while changing a tire. Do not start
the engine when your vehicle is
on the jack. The jack is ONLY
meant for changing the tire.
• Never use the rear differential
as a jacking point.
8. Remove the metal lug nuts with the lug wrench.
9. Replace the flat tire/wheel assembly with the spare tire/wheel
assembly, making sure the valve stem is facing outward. Reinstall lug
nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub. Do not fully tighten the lug
nuts until the wheel has been lowered.
10. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
11. Remove the jack and fully
tighten the lug nuts in the order
shown. Refer to Wheel lug nut
torque specifications later in this
chapter for the proper lug nut
torque specification.
1
3
4
12. For full size spare aluminum
wheel, firmly install the center
ornament. If equipped with a full
size spare tire/wheel assembly and
5
2
lug nut retained full wheelcover, install the wheelcover by tightening the
141
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
five black plastic nuts in the order shown on the wheelcover using the
lug wrench with about 6.0 lbs. ft. (80 N•m) torque. Then firmly install
the wheelcover center ornament.
13. Put flat tire, jack and lug wrench away.
14. Turn on the air suspension switch (if equipped).
WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque at 500 miles (800 km)
after any wheel disturbance (tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel
removal, etc.).
Bolt size
Wheel lug nut torque*
lb.ft.
100
N•m
1
⁄
2
x 20
135
* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and
rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.
When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or
foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel
or the surface of the front disc brake hub and rotor that contacts the
wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the
wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the
wheel to come off while the vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of
control.
INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized
information on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and
describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and
in case of a recall.
142
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Information on “P” type tires
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a
tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
1. P: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that may be used for
service on cars, SUVs, minivans and
light trucks.
Note: If your tire size does not
begin with a letter this may mean it
is designated by either ETRTO
(European Tire and Rim Technical Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association).
2. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
3. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width.
4. R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
6. 95: Indicates the tire’s load index. It is an index that relates to how
much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your
owner’s guide. If not, contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
7. H: Indicates the tire’s speed rating. The speed rating denotes the
speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of
time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tires
on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference
in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart.
143
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
Letter rating
Speed rating - mph (km/h)
81 mph (130 km/h)
87 mph (140 km/h)
99 mph (159 km/h)
106 mph (171 km/h)
112 mph (180 km/h)
118 mph (190 km/h)
124 mph (200 km/h)
130 mph (210 km/h)
149 mph (240 km/h)
168 mph (270 km/h)
186 mph (299 km/h)
M
N
Q
R
S
T
U
H
V
W
Y
Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph (240
km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For those with
a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
manufacturers always use the letters ZR.
8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the
letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The
next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example,
the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers
go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This
information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.
9. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow. or
AT: All Terrain. or
AS: All Season.
10. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of
plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and
sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the
tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
11. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the tire label or the
safety certification label, which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of
the driver’s door, for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle
144
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
12. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
• Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (11⁄2) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
• Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B,
and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
• Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
13. Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers’ maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at
which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is
normally higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on either the tire label or certification label
which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The cold
inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended
pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such
as standard load, radial tubeless, etc.
145
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for “LT” type
tires
“LT” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below:
1. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that is intended for service
on light trucks.
2. Load Range/Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire’s
load-carrying capabilities and its
inflation limits.
3. Maximum Load Dual lbs. (kg)
at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure
when the tire is used as a dual;
defined as four tires on the rear axle (a total of six or more tires on the
vehicle).
4. Maximum Load Single lbs. (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single;
defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle.
146
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Information on “T” type tires
“T” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below:
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire
size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example.
1. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association (T&RA), that is
intended for temporary service on
cars, SUVs, minivans and light
trucks.
2. 145: Indicates the nominal width
of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
3. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall.
4. D: Indicates a “diagonal” type tire.
R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
Location of the tire label
You will find a tire label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size and
other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door.
TIRE CARE
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can also cause tires to wear
abnormally. Here are some of the important maintenance items:
Tire wear
Measure and inspect the tire tread on all your tires periodically.
Advanced and unusual tire wear can reduce the ability of tread to grip
147
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
the road in adverse (wet, snowy, etc.) conditions. Visually check your
tires for uneven wear, looking for high and low areas or unusually
smooth areas. Also check for signs of tire damage.
When the tread is worn down to
1/16th of an inch (2 mm), tires must
be replaced to prevent your vehicle
from skidding and hydroplaning.
Built-in treadwear indicators, or
“wear bars”, which look like narrow
strips of smooth rubber across the
tread will appear on the tire when
the tread is worn down to 1/16th of
an inch (2 mm). When the tire tread
wears down to the same height as
these “wear bars”, the tire is worn
out and should be replaced.
Inspect your tires frequently for any
of the following conditions and
replace them if one or more of the
following conditions exist:
• Fabric showing through the tire
rubber
• Bulges in the tread or sidewalls
• Cracks or cuts on the sidewalls
• Cracks in the tread groove
• Impact damage resulting from use
• Separation in the tread
• Separation in the sidewall
• Severe abrasion on the sidewall
If your vehicle has a leak in the exhaust system, a road tire or the spare
tire may be exposed to hot exhaust temperatures requiring the tire to be
replaced.
Safety practices
Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety.
• Observe posted speed limits
• Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
148
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Avoid potholes and objects on the road
• Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking
If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., do not rapidly
spin the tires; spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause an
explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds.
Never spin the tires in excess of the 35 mph (55 km/h) point
indicated on the speedometer.
Highway hazards
No matter how carefully you drive there’s always the possibility that you
may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but
your safety is more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you
suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your
speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and
inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel. If
you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair
facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
Tire and wheel alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your
vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your
vehicle seems to pull to one side when you’re driving, the wheels may be
out of alignment. Have a qualified technician at a Ford or
Lincoln/Mercury dealer check the wheel alignment periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by a qualified technician
at a Ford or Lincoln/Mercury dealer. Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles
and those with an independent rear suspension (if equipped) may
require alignment of all four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear.
149
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Tire rotation
Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the
Scheduled Maintenance Guide that comes with your vehicle) will help
your tires wear more evenly, providing better tire performance and
longer tire life. Unless otherwise specified, rotate the tires approximately
every 5,000 miles (8,000 km).
• Front Wheel Drive (FWD)
vehicles (front tires at top of
diagram)
150
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Rear Wheel Drive (RWD)
vehicles/Four Wheel Drive
(4WD)/ All Wheel Drive (AWD)
vehicles (front tires at top of
diagram)
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.
Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask a qualified technician at a
Ford or Lincoln/Mercury dealership to check for and correct any wheel
misalignment, tire imbalance or mechanical problem involved before tire
rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A
dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is
different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If
you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel it is intended for temporary use
only and should not be used in a tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked
and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS
Snow tires must be the same size and grade as the tires you
currently have on your vehicle.
The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in
rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow
tires and chains.
151
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains:
• Either cable type chains or SAE class S chains can be used.
• Install chains securely, verifying that the chains do not touch any
wiring, brake lines or fuel lines.
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains rub or bang against your
vehicle, stop and re-tighten the chains. If this does not work, remove
the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle.
• If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle.
• Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed. Do not use
tire chains on dry roads.
• The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle
damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when
using snow tires and chains.
VEHICLE LOADING – WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILER
This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating
capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading
your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s
Safety Certification Label and Tire Label:
Base Curb Weight – is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of
fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or
optional equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight – is the weight of your new vehicle when you
picked it up from your dealer plus any aftermarket equipment.
152
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Cargo Weight – includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight,
including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer tongue load
or king pin weight is also part of cargo weight.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) – is the total weight placed on each axle
(front and rear) – including vehicle curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These
numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label
located on the driver’s door or B-Pillar. The total load on each
axle must never exceed its GAWR.
Exceeding the Safety Certification Label axle weight rating limits
could result in substandard vehicle handling or performance,
engine, transmission and/or structural damage, serious damage to the
vehicle, loss of control and personal injury.
Note: For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in
this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your
dealership.
153
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) – is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo +
passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) – is the maximum
allowable weight of the fully loaded
vehicle (including all options,
equipment, passengers and cargo).
The GVWR is shown on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label located on the driver’s
door or B-Pillar. The GVW must
never exceed the GVWR.
Exceeding the Safety Certification Label vehicle weight rating
limits could result in substandard vehicle handling or
performance, engine, transmission and/or structural damage, serious
damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal injury.
154
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
GCW (Gross Combined Weight) – is the weight of the loaded vehicle
(GVW) plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer – including all cargo and
passengers – that the vehicle can handle without risking damage.
(Important: The towing vehicle’s braking system is rated for operation at
GVWR, not at GCWR. Separate functional brakes should be used for safe
control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the towing
vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle. The
GCW must never exceed the GCWR.
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight – is the highest possible weight of a
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It assumes a vehicle with only
mandatory options, no cargo (internal or external), a tongue load of
10–15% (conventional trailer) or king pin weight of 15–25% (fifth wheel
trailer), and driver only (150 lbs [68 kg]). Consult your dealership (or
the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your dealership) for
more detailed information.
Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the
certification label.
Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities
than the originals because they may lower the vehicle’s GVWR
and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a higher limit than the
originals do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in
serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.
Steps for determining the correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX pounds” on your vehicle’s placard.
155
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX
kilograms or XXX pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lb. and there
will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lb. (1400–750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
The following gives you a few more examples on how to calculate the
available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity:
•
Another example for your vehicle with 1400 pounds of cargo and
luggage capacity. You decide to go golfing. You and your friends average
220 pounds each and the golf bags weigh approximately 30 pounds each.
Is there enough load capacity to carry you, 4 of your friends and all the
golf bags? The calculation would be: 1400 – (5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400
– 1100 – 150 = 150 pounds; yes, you have enough load capacity in your
vehicle to transport 4 of your friends and golf bags.
• A final example for your vehicle with 1400 pounds of cargo and
luggage capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up
cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio
you have planning for the past 2 years. Measuring the inside of the
vehicle with the rear seat folded down, you have room for 12–100
pound bags of cement. Do you have enough load capacity to transport
the cement to your home? If you and your friend each wighed 220
pounds, the calculation would be: 1400 – (2 x 220) - (12 x 100) =
1400 – 440 – 1200 = –40 pounds; no, you do not have enough cargo
capacity to carry that much weight. You will need to reduce the load
weight by at least 240 pounds. If you remove 3–100 pound cement
bags, then the load calculation would be:
1400 – (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 – 440 – 900 = 60 pounds; now you
have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home.
The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your
vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Certification label
found on the driver’s door.
156
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
TRAILER TOWING
Your vehicle is classified as a light duty towing vehicle. Do not tow a
trailer until your vehicle has been driven at least 2,000 miles (3,200 km).
Towing a trailer places an additional load on your vehicle’s engine,
transmission, brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect these components
carefully after towing.
Your loaded trailer should weigh no more than 2,000 lb. (907 kg). Do
not exceed the GVWR specified on the certification label.
Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer
weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could result in
engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover and personal injury.
The GCW of your vehicle and trailer should not exceed 6,600 lb. (2,993 kg).
Preparing to tow
Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it is
properly attached to your vehicle. See your dealer or a reliable trailer
dealer if you require assistance.
Hitches
Do not use hitches that clamp onto the vehicle bumper. Use a load
carrying hitch. You must distribute the load in your trailer so that
10–15% of the total weight of the trailer is on the tongue.
Safety chains
Always connect the trailer’s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers
of the vehicle hitch. To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners.
If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions that the rental agency
gives to you.
Do not attach safety chains to the bumper.
Trailer brakes
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are safe
if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer’s specifications. The
trailer brakes must meet local and Federal regulations.
Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system directly to your
vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not have enough
braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase.
The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the GVWR
not GCWR.
157
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Trailer lamps
Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure all running
lights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working. See your
dealer or trailer rental agency for proper instructions and equipment for
hooking up trailer lamps.
Driving while you tow
When towing a trailer:
• Turn off the speed control. The speed control may shut off
automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades.
• Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer.
• To eliminate excessive shifting, use a lower gear. This will also assist
in transmission cooling. (For additional information, refer to the
Understanding the positions of the 4–speed automatic
transmission section in this chapter.
• Anticipate stops and brake gradually.
• Do not exceed the GCWR rating or transmission damage may occur.
Servicing after towing
If you tow a trailer for long distances, your vehicle will require more
frequent service intervals. Refer to your Scheduled Maintenance Guide
for more information.
Trailer towing tips
• Practice turning, stopping and backing up before starting on a trip to
get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination. When turning, make
wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles.
• Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached.
• If you are driving down a long or steep hill, shift to a lower gear. Do
not apply the brakes continuously, as they may overheat and become
less effective.
• The trailer tongue weight should be 10–15% of the loaded trailer
weight.
• After you have traveled 50 miles (80 km), thoroughly check your
hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts.
• To aid in engine/transmission cooling and A/C efficiency during hot
weather while stopped in traffic, place the gearshift lever in P (Park).
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. If you must
park on a grade, place wheel chocks under the trailer’s wheels.
158
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Launching or retrieving a boat
Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer
into the water. Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after the
trailer is removed from the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval:
• do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of
the rear bumper.
• do not allow waves to break higher than 6 inches (15 cm) above the
bottom edge of the rear bumper.
Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components:
• causing internal damage to the components.
• affecting driveability, emissions and reliability.
Replace the rear axle lubricant any time the axle has been submerged in
water. Rear axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked or changed
unless a leak is suspected or repair required.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (ALL WHEELS ON THE GROUND)
Follow these guidelines for your specific powertrain combination to tow
your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground (such as behind a
recreational vehicle).
These guidelines are designed to ensure that your transmission is not
damaged due to insufficient lubrication.
All Rear Wheel Drive (RWD) vehicles:
This applies to all cars and 4x2 trucks/sport utilities with rear wheel
drive capability.
• Place the transmission in N (Neutral)
• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h)
• Maximum distance is 50 miles (80 km)
If a distance of 50 miles (80 km) or a speed of 35 mph (56 km/h) must
be exceeded, you must disconnect the driveshaft. Ford recommends the
driveshaft be removed/installed only by a qualified technician. See your
local dealer for driveshaft removal/installation.
Improper removal/installation of the driveshaft can cause
transmission fluid loss, damage to the driveshaft and internal
transmission components.
159
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
Driving
STARTING
Positions of the ignition
1. OFF/LOCK, shuts off the engine
and all accessories/locks the
gearshift lever and allows key
removal.
2. ACC, allows the electrical
accessories such as the radio to
operate while the engine is not
running.
3. ON, all electrical circuits
operational. Warning lights
illuminated. Key position when driving.
4. START, cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine
starts.
Preparing to start your vehicle
Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system. This
system meets all Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment standard
requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio
noise.
When starting a fuel-injected engine, avoid pressing the accelerator
before or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you have
difficulty starting the engine. For more information on starting the
vehicle, refer to Starting the engine in this chapter.
Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and exhaust system, creating the risk
of fire or other damage.
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed
areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open the garage door
before you start the engine. See Guarding against exhaust fumes in
this chapter for more instructions.
160
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer
inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
Important safety precautions
A computer system controls the engine’s idle revolutions per minute
(RPM). When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs higher than normal in
order to warm the engine. If the engine idle speed does not slow down
automatically, have the vehicle checked. Do not allow the vehicle to idle
for more than 10 minutes at the higher engine RPM.
Before starting the vehicle:
1. Make sure all vehicle occupants have buckled their safety belts. For
more information on safety belts and their proper usage, refer to the
Seating and Safety Restraints chapter.
2. Make sure the headlamps and vehicle accessories are off.
3. Make sure the gearshift is in P
(Park).
4. Make sure the parking brake is
set.
HOOD
161
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
5. Turn the key to 3 (ON) without
turning the key to 4 (START).
Make sure the corresponding lights illuminate or illuminate briefly. If a
light fails to illuminate, have the vehicle serviced.
• If the driver’s safety belt is fastened, the
light may not illuminate.
162
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
Starting the engine
1. Turn the key to 3 (ON) without
turning the key to 4 (START).
2. Turn the key to 4 (START), then
release the key as soon as the
engine starts. Excessive cranking
could damage the starter.
Note: If the engine does not start within five seconds on the first try,
turn the key to OFF, wait 10 seconds and try again. If the engine still
fails to start, press the accelerator to the floor and try again; this will
allow the engine to crank with the fuel shut off in case the engine is
flooded with fuel.
Using the engine block heater (if equipped)
Use of an engine block heater is strongly recommended if you live in a
region where temperatures reach -10°F (-23°C) or below. For best
results, plug the heater in at least three hours before starting the vehicle.
The heater can be plugged in the night before starting the vehicle.
To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use your heater
with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged (cheater)
adapters.
Guarding against exhaust fumes
Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid
its dangerous effects.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer
inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
Important ventilating information
If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of
time, open the windows at least one inch (2.5 cm) or adjust the heating
or air conditioning to bring in fresh air.
163
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
BRAKES
Your service brakes are self-adjusting. Refer to the scheduled
maintenance guide for scheduled maintenance.
Occasional brake noise is normal and often does not indicate a
performance concern with the vehicle’s brake system. In normal
operation, automotive brake systems may emit occasional or intermittent
squeal or groan noises when the brakes are applied. Such noises are
usually heard during the first few brake applications in the morning;
however, they may be heard at any time while braking and can be
aggravated by environmental conditions such as cold, heat, moisture,
road dust, salt or mud. If a “metal-to-metal,” “continuous grinding” or
“continuous squeal” sound is present while braking, the brake linings
may be worn-out and should be inspected by a qualified service
technician.
Refer to Brake system warning
BRAKE
! P
light in the Instrument Cluster
chapter for information on the brake
system warning light.
If you are driving down a long or steep hill, shift to a lower gear.
Do not apply your brakes continuously, as they may overheat
and become less effective.
Under normal operating conditions, brake dust may accumulate on the
wheels. Some brake dust is inevitable as brakes wear and does not
contribute to brake noise. The use of modern friction materials with
emphasis on improved performance and environmental considerations
can lead to more dust than in the past. Brake dust can be cleaned by
weekly washing with soapy water and a soft sponge. Heavier deposits can
be removed with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37–A).
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
This vehicle is equipped with an anti-lock braking system (ABS). A noise
from the hydraulic pump motor and pulsation in the pedal may be
observed during ABS braking events. Pedal pulsation coupled with noise
while braking under panic conditions or on loose gravel, bumps, wet or
snowy roads is normal and indicates proper functioning of the vehicle’s
anti-lock brake system. If the vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder
in the steering wheel while braking, the vehicle should be inspected by a
qualified service technician.
164
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
The ABS operates by detecting the
onset of wheel lockup during brake
applications and compensates for
this tendency. The wheels are
prevented from locking even when
the brakes are firmly applied. The
accompanying illustration depicts
the advantage of an ABS equipped
vehicle (on bottom) to a non-ABS
equipped vehicle (on top) during hard braking with loss of front braking
traction.
Using ABS
• In an emergency or when maximum efficiency from the four-wheel
ABS is required, apply continuous force on the brake. The four wheel
ABS will be activated immediately, thus allowing you to retain steering
control of your vehicle and, providing there is sufficient space, will
enable you to avoid obstacles and bring the vehicle to a controlled
stop.
• The anti-lock system does not reduce stopping distance. Always leave
enough room between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to
stop.
• We recommend that you familiarize yourself with this braking
technique. However, avoid taking any unnecessary risks.
ABS warning lamp
The ABS warning lamp in the
instrument cluster momentarily
ABS
illuminates when the ignition is
turned on. If the light does not
illuminate momentarily at start up,
remains on or continues to flash, the ABS needs to be serviced.
With the ABS light on, the anti-lock
BRAKE
! P
brake system is disabled and normal
braking is still effective unless the
brake warning light also remains
illuminated with parking brake
released. (If your brake warning lamp illuminates, have your vehicle
serviced immediately.)
165
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
Parking brake with auto-release (if equipped)
Apply the parking brake whenever
the vehicle is parked.
To set the parking brake:
1. Move the gearshift to P (Park).
2. Push pedal downward.
HOOD
The BRAKE warning lamp in the
instrument cluster illuminates and
remains illuminated (when the
ignition is turned ON) until the
parking brake is fully released.
BRAKE
! P
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position
and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
The parking brake is not recommended to stop a moving vehicle.
However, if the normal brakes fail, the parking brake can be used to stop
your vehicle in an emergency. Since the parking brake applies only the
rear brakes, the vehicle’s stopping distance will increase greatly and the
handling of your vehicle will be adversely affected.
Your vehicle may be equipped with an automatic parking brake release.
To release the parking brake:
1. Start the vehicle.
2. Press the brake pedal.
3. Move the gearshift from the P (Park) position to one of the forward
gears (the parking brake will not release automatically when you shift
into reverse). The brake pedal must remain pressed while the gearshift is
moved.
166
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
If the parking brake fails to release
after completing this procedure, use
the manual parking brake release
lever.
Pull the lever to manually release
the parking brake.
TRACTION CONTROLி (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with the optional Traction Control
system. This system helps you maintain the stability and steerability of
your vehicle. It is especially useful on slippery and/or hilly road surfaces.
The system operates by detecting and controlling wheel spin. The system
borrows many of the electronic and mechanical elements already present
in the anti-lock braking system (ABS).
Wheel-speed sensors allow excess rear wheel spin to be detected by the
Traction Control portion of the ABS computer. Any excessive wheel
spin is controlled by automatically applying and releasing the rear brakes
in conjunction with engine torque reductions. Engine torque reduction is
realized via the fully electronic spark and fuel injection systems. This
process is very sensitive to driving conditions and very fast acting. The
rear wheels “search” for optimum traction several times a second and
adjustments are made accordingly.
Aggressive driving in any road conditions can cause you to lose
control of your vehicle increasing the risk of severe personal
injury or property damage. The occurrence of an Traction Control
event is an indication that at least some of the tires have exceeded
their ability to grip the road; this may lead to an increased risk of loss
of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. If you
experience a severe road event, SLOW DOWN.
The Traction Control system will allow your vehicle to make better use
of available traction on slippery surfaces while you are trying to
accelerate or while your foot is on the accelerator pedal. The system is a
driver aid which makes your vehicle easier to handle primarily on snow
and ice covered roads.
167
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
During Traction Control operation you may hear an electric motor type
of sound coming from the engine compartment and the engine will not
“rev-up” when you push further on the accelerator. This is normal
system behavior.
If you should become stuck in snow
or ice or on a very slippery road
surface, try switching the Traction
Control system off. This may allow
excess wheel spin to “dig” the
vehicle out and enable a successful
“rocking” maneuver.
The traction control indicator
flashes during a Traction Control
system event.
If the traction control indicator
comes on and stays lit, either:
• the Traction Control system
requires service, or
• the customer has disabled the system using the traction control switch
located on the left side of the instrument panel.
The Traction Control system will be on every time you turn the ignition
key from OFF to ON until you deactivate the system using the traction
control switch on the instrument panel left of the steering column.
STEERING
Ford Motor Company recommends that a certified technician
inspect all steering column assemblies in use in vehicles involved
in a collision. Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the steering
column assembly could result in severe injury or death in the event of
a collision.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the steering column,
its adaptive module, or its fuses. See your Ford or Lincoln
Mercury dealer.
To prevent damage to the power steering system, never hold the steering
wheel at its furthest turning points (until it stops) for more than a few
seconds when the engine is running.
168
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
It is also important to maintain a proper power steering fluid level in the
power steering fluid reservoir:
• Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering pump fluid level
(below the MIN mark on the reservoir).
• Some noise is normal during operation. If the noise is excessive, check
for low power steering pump fluid level before seeking service by your
dealer.
• Heavy or uneven steering efforts may be caused by low power steering
pump fluid level. Check for low power steering pump fluid level before
seeking service by your dealer.
• Do not fill the power steering pump reservoir above the MAX mark on
the reservoir, as this may result in leaks from the reservoir.
If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned
off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort.
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• an improperly inflated tire
• uneven tire wear
• loose or worn suspension components
• loose or worn steering components
• improper steering alignment
Speed sensitive steering
The steering in your vehicle is speed sensitive. At high speeds, steering
assist will decrease to improve steering feel. At lower speeds,
maneuverability will be increased.
If the amount of effort required to steer your vehicle changes while
driving at a constant vehicle speed, have the power steering system
checked by your dealer or a qualified service technician.
AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The air suspension system is designed to improve ride, handling and
general vehicle performance during:
• Certain road conditions
• Steering maneuvers
• Braking
• Accelerations
169
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
This system keeps the rear of your vehicle at a constant level by
automatically adding air or releasing air from the springs.
If you exceed the load limit, the rear air suspension may not operate.
The air suspension shut-off switch is
AIR SUSPENSION
located on the left side of the trunk.
SWITCH
If this switch is in the OFF position,
INTERRUPTEUR DE
the rear air suspension will not
LA SUSPENSION
PNEUMATIQUE
operate.
WARNING
OFF
On vehicles equipped with
To prevent sudden
vehicle movement,
Air Suspension, turn OFF
turn off air suspen-
the Air Suspension switch prior to
sion switch prior to
jacking, hoisting or
jacking, hoisting or towing your
towing vehicle.
OFF-ARRET
vehicle.
AVERTISSEMENT
Pour prévenir tout mouvement soudain du véhi-
cule, placer à l'arrêt l'interrupteur de la suspension
pneumatique avant de lever le véhicule (cric ou
pont élévateur) ou de le remorquer.
Normal vehicle operation does not
require any action by the driver.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION
Brake-shift interlock – column-shift transmission
This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents
the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is
in the ON position unless brake pedal is depressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in
the ON position and the brake pedal depressed, it is possible that a fuse
has blown or the vehicle’s brakelamps are not operating properly. Refer
to Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
If the fuse is not blown, perform the following procedure:
1. Apply the parking brake, turn the ignition to 2 (ACC).
170
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
2. Locate the access plug on the
underside of the steering column
cover.
3. Remove the access plug using a flat head screwdriver, then push and
hold the override button using a flat head screwdriver. Apply the brake
pedal and shift the transmission into N (Neutral) while continuing to
depress the override button.
4. Reinstall the access plug cover, start the vehicle and release the
parking brake.
Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brakelamps
are working.
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position
and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp
remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly.
See your dealer or a qualified service technician.
Brake-shift interlock – floor-shift transmission
This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents
the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is
in the ON position unless the brake pedal is depressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in
the ON position and the brake pedal depressed:
1. Apply the parking brake, turn ignition key to LOCK, then remove the
key.
171
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
2. Insert the key and turn it to OFF. Apply the brake pedal and shift
to N (Neutral).
When the key is in the ignition and in the OFF position, the
automatic transmission shift lever can be moved from the P
(Park) position without the brake pedal depressed. To avoid unwanted
vehicle movement, always set the parking brake.
3. Start the vehicle.
If it is necessary to use the above procedure to move the gearshift lever,
it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle’s brakelamps are not
operating properly. Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside
Emergencies chapter.
Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brakelamps
are working.
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp
remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly.
See your dealer or a qualified service technician.
Understanding the gearshift positions of the 4–speed automatic
transmission
P (Park)
This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from
turning.
To put your vehicle in gear:
• Start the engine
172
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
• Depress the brake pedal
• Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear
To put your vehicle in P (Park):
• Come to a complete stop
• Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R
(Reverse).
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.
(Overdrive)
The normal driving position for the
best fuel economy. Transmission
operates in gears one through four.
If your vehicle is equipped with a
column-shift transmission, overdrive
can be deactivated by pressing the
transmission control switch on the
gearshift lever.
173
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
If your vehicle is equipped with a
floor-shift transmission, overdrive
can be deactivated by pressing the
transmission control switch on the
gearshift handle.
The transmission control indicator light (TCIL) will illuminate on the
instrument cluster.
• Standard instrument cluster
O/D
OFF
• Optional instrument cluster
CHECK AIR SUSPENSION
OVERDRIVE OFF
DOOR
AJAR
LOW
km
MILES
/GAL
WASHER
FLUID
TRUNK AJAR
LTR/100 km
Drive (not shown)
Drive is activated when the transmission control switch is pressed.
• This position allows for all forward gears except overdrive.
• O/D OFF lamp is illuminated.
• Provides engine braking.
• Use when driving conditions cause excessive shifting from O/D to
other gears. Examples: city traffic, hilly terrain, heavy loads, trailer
towing and when engine braking is required.
• To return to O/D (overdrive mode), press the transmission control
switch. The O/D OFF lamp will not be illuminated.
• O/D (Overdrive) is automatically returned each time the key is turned
off.
174
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
2 (Second)
This position allows for second gear only.
• Provides engine braking.
• Use to start-up on slippery roads.
• To return to
(Overdrive), move the gearshift lever into the
(Overdrive) position.
• Selecting 2 (Second) at higher speeds will cause the transmission to
downshift to second gear at the appropriate vehicle speed.
1 (First)
• Provides maximum engine braking.
• Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever.
• Will not downshift into 1 (First) at high speeds; allows for 1 (First)
when vehicle reaches slower speeds.
Forced downshifts
• Allowed in
(Overdrive) or Drive.
• Depress the accelerator to the floor.
• Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
TRACTION-LOK AXLE (IF EQUIPPED)
This axle provides added traction on slippery surfaces, particularly when
one wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under normal conditions, the
Traction-Lok axle functions like a standard rear axle.
Extended use of other than the manufacturer’s specified size tires on a
Traction-Lok rear axle could result in a permanent reduction in
effectiveness. This loss of effectiveness does not affect normal driving
and should not be noticeable to the driver.
175
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Do not drive quickly through standing water, especially if the depth is
unknown. Traction or brake capability may be limited and if the ignition
system gets wet, your engine may stall. Water may also enter your
engine’s air intake and severely damage your engine.
If driving through deep or standing water is unavoidable, proceed very
slowly. Never drive through water that is higher than the bottom of the
hubs (for trucks) or the bottom of the wheel rims (for cars).
Once through the water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop
the vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by
moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake
pedal.
Driving through deep water where the transmission vent tube is
submerged may allow water into the transmission and cause
internal transmission damage. Have the fluid checked and, if
water is found, replace the fluid.
176
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Roadside Emergencies
GETTING ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor
Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This
program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service
is available:
• 24–hours, seven days a week
• for the New Vehicle Limited Warranty period of three years or 36,000
miles (60,000 km), whichever occurs first on Ford and Mercury
vehicles, and four years or 50,000 miles (80,000 km) on Lincoln
vehicles.
Roadside assistance will cover:
• a flat tire change with a good spare (except Ford GT which has a tire
inflation kit)
• battery jump start
• lock-out assistance (key replacement cost is the customer’s
responsibility)
• fuel delivery (2.0 gallons [7.5L], maximum two occurrences within 12
month period)
• towing of your disabled vehicle to the nearest Ford Motor Company
dealership, or your selling dealer if within 35 miles (56.3 km) of the
nearest Ford Motor Company dealership (one tow per disablement).
Even non-warranty related tows, like accidents, are covered (some
exclusions apply, such as impound towing or repossession).
Canadian customers refer to your Owner Information Guide for
information on:
• coverage period
• exact fuel amounts
• towing of your disabled vehicle
• emergency travel expense reimbursement
• travel planning benefits
USING ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. In the United States, this card is found in the
Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment. In Canada, the card is
found in the Owner Information Guide in the glove compartment.
U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicle customers who require roadside assistance,
call 1–800–241–3673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 1–800–521–4140.
177
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call
1–800–665–2006.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor
Company will reimburse a reasonable amount. To obtain reimbursement
information, U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicles customers call
1-800-241-3673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 1–800–521–4140.
Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information, call
1–800–665–2006.
ROADSIDE COVERAGE BEYOND BASIC WARRANTY
In the United States, you may purchase additional roadside assistance
coverage beyond this period through the Ford Auto Club by contacting
your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer.
Similarly in Canada, for uninterrupted Roadside Assistance coverage, you
may purchase extended coverage prior to your Basic Warranty’s Roadside
Assistance expiring. For more information and enrollment, contact
1–877–294–2582 or visit our website at www.ford.ca.
HAZARD FLASHER
Use only in an emergency to warn traffic of vehicle breakdown,
approaching danger, etc. The hazard flashers can be operated when the
ignition is off.
• The hazard lights control is
located on top of the steering
column.
• Depress hazard lights control to
activate all hazard flashers
simultaneously.
• Depress control again to turn the
flashers off.
FUEL
FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF SWITCH
RESET
The fuel pump shut-off switch is a device intended to stop the electric
fuel pump when your vehicle has been involved in a substantial jolt.
After a collision, if the engine cranks but does not start, the fuel pump
shut-off switch may have been activated.
178
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
The fuel pump shut-off switch is
located on the left side of the trunk
behind the left rear tail light and the
trunk liner.
Use the following procedure to reset the fuel pump shut-off switch.
1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
2. Check the fuel system for leaks.
3. If no fuel leak is apparent, reset the fuel pump shut-off switch by
pushing in on the reset button.
4. Turn the ignition to the ON position. Pause for a few seconds and
return the key to the OFF position.
5. Make a further check for leaks in the fuel system.
FUSES AND RELAYS
Fuses
If electrical components in the
vehicle are not working, a fuse may
have blown. Blown fuses are
identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate
15
fuses before replacing any electrical
components.
179
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage
rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire
damage and could start a fire.
Standard fuse amperage rating and color
COLOR
Cartridge
Fuse
rating
Mini
fuses
Standard
fuses
Maxi
fuses
Fuse link
cartridge
maxi
fuses
—
—
—
2A
3A
4A
Grey
Violet
Pink
Tan
Grey
Violet
Pink
Tan
—
—
—
—
—
—
5A
—
—
—
7.5A
10A
15A
20A
25A
30A
40A
50A
60A
70A
80A
Brown
Red
Brown
Red
—
—
—
Yellow
—
Green
Orange
Red
Blue
Tan
Natural
—
—
—
Blue
—
Pink
Green
Red
—
—
—
—
—
—
Blue
—
Pink
Green
Red
Yellow
Brown
Black
Blue
Yellow
Natural
Green
—
Blue
Yellow
Natural
Green
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Passenger compartment fuse panel
The fuse panel is located below and to the left of the steering wheel by
the brake pedal. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses.
To remove a fuse use the fuse puller tool provided on the fuse panel
cover.
180
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Relay
1
27
25
23
21
19
26
24
22
20
18
9
16
7
14
5
12
3
10
33
31
29
32
30
28
17
8
15
6
13
4
11
2
1
The fuses are coded as follows.
Fuse/Relay
Location
1
Fuse Amp
Rating
15A
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel Description
Taxi, Cluster, Lighting Control
Module (Interior Lighting)
Ignition (ON) - Electronic
Automatic Temperature Control
(EATC) module, A/C mode switch
(vehicles equipped with EATC
only)
2
10A
3
4
10A
10A
EATC module (vehicles equipped
with EATC only)
Audio (base audio system on
vehicles not equipped with EATC)
Ignition (ON) - Anti-lock Brake
System (ABS) module, Positive
Crankcase Ventilation (PCV)
181
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
5
Fuse Amp
Rating
10A
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel Description
Speed control deactivation switch,
Stop signal, Brake-Transmission
Shift Interlock (BTSI)
(column-shift transmission)
6
7
10A
10A
Ignition (ON) - Cluster
LCM (Park lamps, Switch
illumination)
8
10A
Ignition (ON) - Rear Air
Suspension Module (RASM),
Variable Assist POwer Steering
(VAPS)
9
20A
5A
LCM (Headlamps, Cornering
lamps)
Ignition (ON/START) - Driver’s
Door Module (DDM), Police PDB
(Police vehicles only)
10
11
10A
Ignition (START) - ON/ACC
(window) relay coil (non-Police
vehicles only)
Ignition (START) - ON/ACC
(window and decklid) relay coil
and Police ON/ACC relay coil
(Police vehicles only)
12
10A
Ignition (ON/START) - Starter
relay coil, DTRS
13
14
10A
10A
Ignition (START) - Wiper module
Ignition (ON) - BTSI (Floor-shift
transmission)
15
7.5A
Ignition (START) - LCM, Door
lock switch illumination, Heated
seat switch illumination,
Moonroof, Overhead console,
Electrochromatic mirror
182
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
15A
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel Description
16
17
18
Ignition (ON) - Turn signals
Ignition (START) - Audio
Ignition (ON) - A/C mode switch
(manual A/C only), Blend door,
DDM, Heated seat modules,
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
module
10A
10A
19
20
10A
10A
Left-hand low beam, DRL
Ignition (ON/ACC) - Back-up
lamps
21
22
10A
10A
Right-hand low beam, DRL
Ignition (ON/ACC) - Restraint
Control Module (RCM), Occupant
Classification Sensor (OCS),
Passenger Air bag Deactivation
Indicator (PADI)
23
24
15A
10A
Multi-function switch
(Flash-to-pass)
Ignition (ON/ACC) - Passive
Anti-Theft System (PATS)
module, Powertrain Control
Module (PCM) relay coil, Fuel
relay coil, Ignition coil relay coil
Autolamp/Sunload sensor, Power
mirrors, Door lock switches
(DDM), Adjustable pedal switch
Ignition (ON/ACC) - Analog
cluster, Warning lamp module,
LCM, Overdrive cancel switch,
Rear defroster relay coil
Cigar lighter, OBD II, Power point
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
(CHMSL)
25
26
10A
10A
27
28
20A
10A
183
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
15A
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel Description
Audio
29
30
31
15A
15A
20A
10A
Stop lamps, MFS
Hazards (non-Police vehicles)
Hazards (Police vehicles)
Mirror heaters, Rear defroster
switch indicator
32
33
—
Not used
Relay 1
Full ISO relay Rear defroster
Power distribution box
The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment. The
power distribution box contains high-current fuses that protect your
vehicle’s main electrical systems from overloads.
Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current
fuses.
Always replace the cover to the power distribution box before
reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid reservoirs
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, refer to the
Battery section of the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
184
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
503
118
114
110
106
102
101
204
203
202
209
208
206
205
304
502
501
602
601
117
116
113
112
109
108
105
104
24
23
22
21
303
302
115
12
111
10
107
103
201
207
18
17
16
14
13
8
7
6
5
4
2
1
20
19
301
15
11
9
3
The high-current fuses are coded as follows.
Fuse/Relay
Location
1
Fuse Amp
Rating
20A*
Power Distribution Box
Description
Ignition switch (Key in, RUN 1,
RUN 2)
2
3
25A*
10A*
Ignition switch (RUN/START,
RUN/ACC, START)
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
keep alive power
4
5
20A*
10A*
Fuel relay feed
Rear Air Suspension Module
(RASM), VAPS module
Alternator regulator
PCM relay feed
Driver’s Door Module (DDM),
Door locks
6
7
8
15A*
30A*
20A*
9
10
11
15A*
20A*
15A*
Ignition coil relay feed
Horn relay feed
A/C clutch relay feed
185
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
12
Fuse Amp
Rating
25A*
Power Distribution Box
Description
Audio (non-Police vehicles only)
Tray lamps (Police vehicles only)
Instrument panel power point
Stop lamp switch
Heated seats
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
module
13
14
15
16
20A*
20A*
20A*
20A*
17
18
19
20
—
—
15A*
15A*
Not used
Not used
Injectors
PCM, Mass Air Flow (MAF)
sensor
21
22
15A*
—
Powertrain loads and sensors
Not used
23
—
Not used
24
5A*
Radio mute
101
102
103
40A**
50A**
50A**
Blower relay feed
Cooling fan
Instrument panel (I/P) fuse box
feed #1, I/P fuses 23, 25, 27 and
31
104
40A**
Instrument panel (I/P) fuse box
feed #2, I/P fuses 1, 3, 5, 7 and 9
Starter relay feed
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
module (Pump)
105
106
30A**
40A**
107
40A**
Rear defroster relay feed
186
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
108
Fuse Amp
Rating
Power Distribution Box
Description
Moonroof (non-Police vehicles
only)
20A**
Spotlights (available on Police
vehicles, Long Wheel Base [LWB]
vehicles and commercial vehicles
only)
109
110
111
20A**
30A**
50A**
ABS module (Valves)
Wiper module
Police PDB or Police I/P accessory
battery feed (Police vehicles only)
Air suspension compressor
(non-Police vehicles only)
Police PDB relay feed (Police
vehicles only)
Police light bar or Police Trunk
accessory battery feed (Police
vehicles only)
112
30A**
40A**
50A**
113
114
115
50A**
50A**
Police PDB or Police I/P accessory
battery feed (Police vehicles only)
Rear power point or Police trunk
accessory battery feed (Police
vehicles only)
116
117
118
50A**
50A**
50A**
Police I/P accessory battery feed
(Police vehicles only)
Police PDB or Police I/P accessory
battery feed (Police vehicles only)
Rear power point or Police trunk
accessory battery feed (Police
vehicles only)
1
1
201
202
203
⁄
⁄
2
2
ISO relay
—
ISO relay
A/C clutch
Not used
Ignition coil
187
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
204
Fuse Amp
Rating
Power Distribution Box
Description
PCM
Not used
Fuel
Not used
Not used
Horn
1
⁄
2
ISO relay
—
205
206
207
208
1
⁄
2
ISO relay
—
—
1
209
⁄
2
ISO relay
301
Full ISO relay Starter
302
Full ISO relay Air compressor (non-Police
vehicles only)
RUN/ACC relay (Police vehicles
only)
303
304
Full ISO relay Blower
Full ISO relay RUN/ACC relay (windows)
(non-police vehicles only)
RUN/ACC relay (windows and
decklid) (police vehicles only)
501
502
503
601
Diode
Diode
Diode
A/C clutch
PCM
Horn, Door latch
Power seats, Lumbar, Decklid
20A Circuit
breaker
20A Circuit
breaker
602
RUN/ACC relay (windows)
(non-police vehicles only)
RUN/ACC relay feed (windows
and decklid) (police vehicles
only)
* Mini fuse ** Cartridge fuse
Relays
Relays are located in the power distribution box and should be replaced
by qualified technicians.
188
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
JUMP STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames,
sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in injury or
vehicle damage.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin, eyes and
clothing, if contacted.
Do not attempt to push-start your vehicle. Automatic
transmissions do not have push-start capability; doing so may
damage the catalytic converter.
Preparing your vehicle
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the
transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the transmission
may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is considered normal and
will not affect function or durability of the transmission. Over time, the
adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation.
1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle.
2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.
3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle
making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on
both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving
parts.
4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before
you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level.
5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect any electrical
surges. Turn all other accessories off.
189
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Connecting the jumper cables
–
–
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of
the discharged battery.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
–
–
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the assisting battery.
190
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
–
–
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the
assisting battery.
–
–
4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposed
metal part of the stalled vehicle’s engine, away from the battery and the
carburetor/fuel injection system. Do not use fuel lines, engine rocker
covers or the intake manifold as grounding points.
Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative (-)
terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may cause an
explosion of the gases that surround the battery.
5. Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of
both engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.
191
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Jump starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at
moderately increased speed.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an
additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.
Removing the jumper cables
–
–
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were
connected.
1. Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
–
–
2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) connection of the
booster vehicle’s battery.
192
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
–
–
3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle’s battery.
–
–
4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the
disabled vehicle’s battery.
After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables
removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can
relearn its idle conditions.
193
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
WRECKER TOWING
If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing
service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your
roadside assistance service provider.
It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift or flatbed
equipment. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor Company has not
approved a slingbelt towing procedure.
Before your vehicle can be towed, the air suspension control in the
luggage compartment must be turned to the OFF position (if equipped).
If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicle
damage may occur.
Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow
truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for
proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle.
194
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
Customer Assistance
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED
At home
You must take your Ford vehicle to an authorized Ford dealer for
warranty repairs. While any Ford dealership handling your vehicle line
will provide warranty service, we recommend you return to your selling
dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction. Please note that
certain warranty repairs require special training and/or equipment, so not
all dealers are authorized to perform all warranty repairs. This means
that, depending on the warranty repair needed, you may have to take
your vehicle to another dealer. A reasonable time must be allowed to
perform a repair after taking your vehicle to the dealership. Repairs will
be made using Ford or Motorcraft parts, or remanufactured or other
parts that are authorized by Ford.
If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you
are receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your
selling/servicing dealership.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales
Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company
policies or procedures, please contact the Ford Customer Relationship
Center at the number below.
Away from home
If you own a Ford or Mercury vehicle and are away from home when
your vehicle needs service, or if you need more help than the dealership
could provide, after following the steps described above, contact the
Ford Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealership to
help you.
In the United States:
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
www.customersaskford.com
195
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
In Canada:
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
www.ford.ca
If you own a Lincoln vehicle and are away from home when your vehicle
needs service, or if you need more help than the dealership could
provide, after following the steps described above, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealership to help
you.
In the United States:
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
1-800-521-4140
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
www.customersaskford.com
In Canada:
Lincoln Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
1-800-387-9333
www.lincolncanada.com
In order to help you service your Lincoln vehicle, please have the
following information available when contacting the Lincoln Centre:
• Your telephone number (home and business)
• The name of the dealer and the city where the dealership is located
• The year and make of your vehicle
• The date of vehicle purchase
• The current odometer reading
• The vehicle identification number (VIN)
Additional Assistance
If you still have a complaint involving a warranty dispute, you may wish
to contact the Dispute Settlement Board (U.S.).
196
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
In some states (in the U.S.) you must directly notify Ford in writing
before pursuing remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also
allowed a final repair attempt in some states.
In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the
Dispute Settlement Board before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing
replacement or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This
dispute handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state
created rights or other rights which are independent of the
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or state replacement or repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer
or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the
vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of
attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the
vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer
use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer
has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its
applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership
of a new vehicle or the first 18,000 miles (29,000 km), whichever occurs
first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non-conformity
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a
defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of
the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of
more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time)
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the
manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
197
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
THE DISPUTE SETTLEMENT BOARD (U.S. ONLY)
The Dispute Settlement Board is:
• an independent, third-party arbitration program for warranty disputes.
• available free to owners and lessees of qualifying Ford Motor Company
vehicles.
The Dispute Settlement Board may not be available in all states. Ford
Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations, modify
procedures and/or to discontinue this service without notice and without
incurring obligations per applicable state law.
What kinds of cases does the Board review?
Unresolved warranty repair concerns or vehicle performance concerns as
on Ford and Lincoln Mercury cars and Ford and Lincoln Mercury light
trucks which are within the terms of any applicable written new vehicle
warranty are eligible for review, except those involving:
• a non-Ford product
• a non-Ford dealership
• sales disputes between customer and dealer except those associated
with warranty repairs or concerns with the vehicle’s performance as
designed
• a request for reimbursement of consequential expenses unless a
service or product concern is being reviewed
• items not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty (including
maintenance and wear items)
• alleged personal injury/property damage claims
• cases currently in litigation
• vehicles not used primarily for family, personal or household purposes
(except in states where the Dispute Settlement Board is required to
review commercial vehicles)
• vehicles with non-U.S. warranties
Concerns are ineligible for review if the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
has expired at receipt of your application and, in certain states eligibility
is dependent upon the customer’s possession of the vehicle.
Eligibility may differ according to state law. For example, see the unique
brochures for California, West Virginia, Georgia and Wisconsin
purchasers/lessees.
198
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
Board membership
The Board consists of:
• Three consumer representatives
• A Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealership representative
Consumer candidates for Board membership are recruited and trained by
an independent consulting firm. The dealership Board member is chosen
from Ford and Lincoln Mercury dealership management, recognized for
their business leadership qualities.
What the Board needs
To have your case reviewed you must complete the application in the
DSB brochure and mail it to the address provided on the application
form. Some states will require you to use certified mail, with return
receipt requested.
Your application is reviewed and, if it is determined to be eligible, you
will receive an acknowledgment indicating:
• The file number assigned to your application.
• The toll-free phone number of the DSB’s independent administrator.
Your dealership and a Ford Motor Company representative will then be
asked to submit statements.
To properly review your case, the Board needs the following information:
• Legible copies of all documents and maintenance or repair orders
relevant to the case.
• The year, make, model, and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) listed
on your vehicle ownership license.
• The date of repair(s) and mileage at the time of occurrence(s).
• The current mileage.
• The name of the dealer(s) who sold or serviced the vehicle.
• A brief description of your unresolved concern.
• A brief summary of the action taken by the dealer(s) and Ford Motor
Company.
• The names (if known) of all the people you contacted at the
dealership(s).
• A description of the action you expect to resolve your concern.
You will receive a letter of explanation if your application does not
qualify for Board review.
199
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
Oral presentations
If you would like to make an oral presentation, indicate YES to question
6 on the application. While it is your right to make an oral presentation
before the Board, this is not a requirement and the Board will decide the
case whether or not an oral presentation is made. An oral presentation
may be requested by the Board as well.
Making a decision
Board members review all available information related to each
complaint, including oral presentations, and arrive at a fair and impartial
decision. Board review may be terminated at any time by either party.
Every effort is made to decide the case within 40 days of the date that
all requested information is received by the Board. Since the Board
generally meets once a month, it may take longer for the Board to
consider some cases.
After a case is reviewed, the Board mails you a decision letter and a
form on which to accept or reject the Board’s decision. The decisions of
the Board are binding on Ford (and, in some cases, on the dealer) but
not on consumers who are free to pursue other remedies available to
them under state or federal law.
To request a DSB Brochure/Application
For a brochure/application, speak to your dealer or write/call the Board
at the following address/phone number:
Dispute Settlement Board
P.O. Box 1424
Waukesha, WI 53187–1424
1–800–428–3718
You may also contact the North American Customer Relationship Center
at 1-800-392-3673 (Ford), TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952
or by writing to the Center at the following address:
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, Michigan 48121
200
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM
(CANADA ONLY)
In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford and
the dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern have been
unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial third party
mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight-forward and relatively speedy
alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a
settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal
proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct
hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final; the arbitrator’s
award is binding both to you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces. For more
information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685.
FORD EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN
You can get more protection for your new car or light truck by
purchasing Ford Extended Service Plan (Ford ESP) coverage. It provides
the following:
• Benefits during the warranty period depending on the plan you
purchase (such as: reimbursement for rentals; coverage for certain
maintenance and wear items).
• Protection against covered repair costs after your Bumper-to-Bumper
Warranty expires.
You may purchase Ford ESP from any participating Ford and Lincoln
Mercury and Ford of Canada dealer. There are several plans available in
various time, distance and deductible combinations which can be tailored
to fit your own driving needs. Ford ESP also offers reimbursement
benefits for towing and rental coverage.
When you buy Ford ESP, you receive Peace-of-Mind protection
throughout the United States and Canada, provided by a network of
more than 5,000 participating Ford or Lincoln Mercury and Ford of
Canada dealers.
201
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
If you did not take advantage of the Ford Extended Service Plan at the
time of purchasing your vehicle, you may still be eligible. Since this
information is subject to change, please ask your dealer for complete
details about Ford Extended Service Plan coverage options, or visit the
Ford ESP website at www.ford-esp.com.
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the
appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you
of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock
index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact a district or
owner relations/customer relationship office.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may
damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause
engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company/Ford of
Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper
fuel.
In the United States, using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty
importing your vehicle back into the U.S.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in
Central or South America, the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the
nearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannot help you, write or call:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
WORLDWIDE DIRECT MARKET OPERATIONS
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
FAX: (313) 390-0804
If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest Ford
dealership. If the dealership employees cannot help you, they can direct
you to the nearest Ford affiliate office.
If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of
the U.S. or Canada, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and
new address with Ford Motor Company Worldwide Direct Market
Operations.
202
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
P.O. Box 07150
Detroit, Michigan 48207
Or call:
For a free publication catalog, order toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website:
www.helminc.com.
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or
money order.)
Obtaining a French owner’s guide
French Owner’s Guides can be obtained from your dealer or by writing to
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited, Service Publications, P.O. Box
1580, Station B, Mississauga, Ontario L4Y 4G3.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and
if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free
at 1–800–424–9393 (or 366–0123 in the Washington D.C. area) or write
to:
NHTSA
400 Seventh Street
U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
the Hotline.
203
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning
Cleaning
WASHING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral
Ph shampoo, such as Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3–A), which is available
from your dealer.
• Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing
or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted
surfaces.
• Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch” or during exposure to
strong, direct sunlight.
• Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for
best results.
• Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to
eliminate water spotting.
• It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the
winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause
damage to the vehicle.
• Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings
and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s
paintwork and trim over time.
• Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a
car wash.
• Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted
surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle,
wash off as soon as possible.
WAXING
Applying a polymer paint sealant to your vehicle every six months will
assist in reducing minor scratches and paint damage.
• Wash the vehicle first.
• Do not use waxes that contain abrasives.
• Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body
(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof
racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl
area. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the parts over time.
204
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning
PAINT CHIPS
Your dealer has touch-up paint and sprays to match your vehicle’s color.
Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the driver’s door jam) to
your dealer to ensure you get the correct color.
• Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips.
• Always read the instructions before using the products.
ALUMINUM WHEELS AND WHEEL COVERS
Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clearcoat paint
finish. In order to maintain their shine:
• Clean weekly with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37–A),
which is available from your dealer. Heavy dirt and brake dust
accumulation may require agitation with a sponge. Rinse thoroughly
with a strong stream of water.
• Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or
covers.
• Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your
wheel rims or covers. Chemical-strength cleaners, or cleaning
chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust
and dirt, could wear away the clearcoat finish over time.
• Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.
• To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover
(ZC-42), available from your dealer.
ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The
high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause
damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the
engine block or other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20) on all parts
that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean.
205
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning
• Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning
the engine.
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running; water in the
running engine may cause internal damage.
PLASTIC (NON-PAINTED) EXTERIOR PARTS
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are
available from your dealer.
• For routine cleaning, use Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3–A).
• If tar or grease spots are present, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover (ZC-42).
WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES
The windshield, rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be
cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe properly, substances on the
vehicle’s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include
hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, tree sap, or other
organic contamination. To clean these items, please follow these tips:
• The windshield, rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with
a non-abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass
Cleaner (ZC-23), available from your dealer.
• Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.
206
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning
• Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.
• Wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or
windshield washer solution. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they
appear worn or do not function properly.
Do not use sharp objects, such as a razor blade, to clean the
inside of the rear window or to remove decals, as it may cause
damage to the rear window defroster’s heated grid lines.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CLUSTER LENS
Clean the instrument panel with a damp cloth, then dry with a dry cloth.
• Avoid cleaners or polish that increase the gloss of the upper portion of
the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the
driver from undesirable windshield reflection.
Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning
the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of
the air bag system.
• Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in
contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan
lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted
surfaces.
INTERIOR TRIM
• Clean the interior trim areas with a damp cloth, then dry by wiping
with a dry, soft, clean cloth.
• Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the
finish.
INTERIOR
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts and seats equipped with side
air bags:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft Extra Strength
Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-41).
• If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first
with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14).
• Never saturate the seat covers with cleaning solution.
• Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of
the seat materials.
207
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning
Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle’s
safety belts, as these actions may weaken the belt webbing.
Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning
the seat-mounted side air bag. Such products could contaminate
the side air bag system and affect performance of the side air bag in a
collision.
LEATHER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
Your leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective coating over the
leather.
• To clean, use a soft cloth with Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl
Cleaner (ZC-11–A). Dry the area with a soft cloth.
• To help maintain its resiliency and color, use the Motorcraft Deluxe
Leather Care Kit (ZC-11–D), available from your authorized dealer.
• Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based
leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing of
the clear, protective coating.
Note: In some instances, color or dye transfer can occur when wet
clothing comes in contact with leather upholstery. If this occurs, the
leather should be cleaned immediately to avoid permanent staining.
UNDERBODY
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and
door drain holes free from packed dirt.
FORD, LINCOLN AND MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS
Your Ford, Lincoln or Mercury dealer has many quality products available
to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. These quality products
have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs; they
are custom designed to complement the style and appearance of your
vehicle. Each product is made from high quality materials that meet or
exceed rigid specifications. For best results, use the following products
or products of equivalent quality:
Motorcraft Custom Clearcoat Polish (ZC–8–A)
Motorcraft Custom Vinyl Protectant (not available in Canada) (ZC-40–A)
208
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning
Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-93)
Motorcraft Vinyl Conditioner (Canada only) (CXC-94)
Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (not available in Canada)
(ZC-11–A)
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)
Motorcraft Extra Strength Upholstery Cleaner (not available in Canada)
(ZC-41)
Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15)
Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37–A)
Motorcraft Dash and Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-38–A)
Motorcraft Car Care Kit (ZC-26)
Motorcraft Premium Car Wash Concentrate (ZC-17-B)
Motorcraft Carlite Glass Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-100)
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14)
Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3–A)
Motorcraft Tire Clean and Shine (ZC-28)
Motorcraft Triple Clean (ZC-13)
Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (not available in Canada)
(ZC-23)
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20)
209
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Maintenance and Specifications
SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS
To help you service your vehicle:
• We highlight do-it-yourself items in the engine compartment for easy
location.
• We provide a scheduled maintenance guide which makes tracking
routine service easy.
If your vehicle requires professional service, your dealership can provide
the necessary parts and service. Check your Warranty Guide/Owner
Information Guide to find out which parts and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts
conforming to specifications. Motorcraft parts are designed and built to
provide the best performance in your vehicle.
Notice to owners of Severe Duty vehicles
Before you have maintenance done on your vehicle, be sure to read the
“Severe Duty Owner’s Guide Supplement.” This book contains important
operation and maintenance information.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other burning (cigarettes) material away
from the battery and all fuel related parts.
Working with the engine off
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.
3. Block the wheels.
210
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Working with the engine on
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Block the wheels.
Note: Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not
remove it while the engine is running.
OPENING THE HOOD
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood
release handle located under the
instrument panel.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and
release the auxiliary latch that is
located under the front of the hood.
3. Lift the hood until the lift
cylinders hold it open.
211
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
4.6L SOHC V8 engine
2
1
9
8
3
6
5
4
7
1. Brake fluid reservoir
2. Engine oil dipstick
3. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
4. Air filter assembly
5. Power steering fluid reservoir
6. Engine coolant reservoir
7. Battery
8. Engine oil filler cap
9. Automatic transmission fluid dipstick
212
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the
level is low. In very cold weather, do
not fill the reservoir completely.
Only use a washer fluid that meets
Ford specification WSB-M8B16–A2.
Refer to Lubricant specifications
in this chapter.
State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the
use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive.
Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the
vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40° F (4.5°C),
use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure to use
washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in
impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident.
Note: Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir. Washer
fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system
components.
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil
Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the appropriate intervals
for checking the engine oil.
1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait up to 10 minutes for the oil to drain into
the oil pan.
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park).
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.
213
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
5. Locate and carefully remove the
engine oil level indicator (dipstick).
6. Wipe the indicator clean. Insert the indicator fully, then remove it
again.
• If the oil level is within this
range, the oil level is acceptable.
DO NOT ADD OIL.
• If the oil level is below this
mark, engine oil must be added
to raise the level within the
normal operating range.
214
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
• If required, add engine oil to the
engine. Refer to Adding engine
oil in this chapter.
• Do not overfill the engine
with oil. Oil levels above this
mark may cause engine
damage. If the engine is
overfilled, some oil must be
removed from the engine by a qualified service technician.
7. Put the indicator back in and ensure it is fully seated.
Adding engine oil
1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to Checking the engine
oil in this chapter.
2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal operating range, add
only certified engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the
engine oil filler cap and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the
opening.
3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above the
normal operating range on the engine oil level indicator (dipstick).
4. Install the indicator and ensure it is fully seated.
5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise
until three clicks can be heard.
To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the
engine oil level indicator and/or the engine oil filler cap removed.
215
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Engine oil and filter recommendations
Look for this certification
trademark.
Use SAE 5W-20 engine oil.
Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms
to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel
economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and
Approval Committee (ISLAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese
automobile manufacturers.
To protect your engine’s warranty use Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 or an
equivalent 5W-20 oil meeting Ford specification WSS-M2C930-A. SAE
5W-20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and durability
performance meeting all requirements for your vehicle’s engine.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, cleaners or other engine
treatments. They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that
is not covered by Ford warranty.
Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule
listed in the scheduled maintenance guide.
Ford production and aftermarket (Motorcraft) oil filters are designed for
added engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used
that does not meet Ford material and design specifications, start-up
engine noises or knock may be experienced.
It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter (or
another brand meeting Ford specifications) for your engine application.
216
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Motorcraft maintenance-free battery
which normally does not require
additional water during its life of
service.
However, for severe usage or in high temperature climates, check the
battery electrolyte level. Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide for
the service interval schedules.
Keep the electrolyte level in each cell up to the “level indicator”.
Do not overfill the battery cells.
If the electrolyte level in the battery is low, you can add plain tap water
to the battery, as long as you do not use hard water (water with a high
mineral or alkali content). If possible, however, try to only fill the battery
cells with distilled water. If the battery needs water often, have the
charging system checked.
If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled
after the battery has been cleaned or replaced.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to
the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the
acid with a solution of baking soda and water.
Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause
personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lighted
substances to come near the battery. When working near the battery,
always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide proper
ventilation.
217
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the
end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps,
resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or battery.
Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite
corners.
Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes
when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of
acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and
lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer,
some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When
the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must
relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and
performance. To begin this process:
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.
2. Put the gearshift in P (Park), turn off all accessories and start the
engine.
3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
6. Release the parking brake. With your foot on the brake pedal and with
the A/C on, put the vehicle in D (Drive) and allow the engine to idle for
at least one minute.
7. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.
• The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles (16 km) or more to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy.
• If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle
quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle
trim is eventually relearned.
218
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,
the clock and radio settings must be reset once the battery is
reconnected.
• Always dispose of automotive
batteries in a responsible manner.
Follow your local authorized
standards for disposal. Call your
local authorized recycling center
to find out more about recycling
automotive batteries.
RECYCLE
ENGINE COOLANT
Checking engine coolant
The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the
mileage intervals listed in the Scheduled Maintenance Guide. The
coolant concentration should be maintained at 50/50 coolant and distilled
water, which equates to a freeze point of -34°F (-36°C). Coolant
concentration testing is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester
(such as the Rotunda Battery and Antifreeze Tester, 014–R1060). The
level of coolant should be maintained at the “FULL COLD” level or
within the “COLD FILL RANGE” in the coolant reservoir. If the level falls
below, add coolant per the instructions in the Adding engine coolant
section.
Your vehicle was factory-filled with a 50/50 engine coolant and water
concentration. If the concentration of coolant falls below 40% or above
60%, the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly. A
50–50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following:
• Freeze protection down to -34°F (-36°C).
• Boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion.
• Enables calibrated gauges to work properly.
219
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
When the engine is cold, check the
level of the engine coolant in the
reservoir.
• The engine coolant should be at the “FULL COLD” level or within the
“COLD FILL RANGE” as listed on the engine coolant reservoir
(depending upon application).
• Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide for service interval
schedules.
• Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your
vehicle in this chapter.
If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval,
the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty. If the reservoir is
low or empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to Adding
engine coolant in this chapter.
Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine
coolant, antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified
function and vehicle location.
Adding engine coolant
When adding coolant, make sure it is a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant
and distilled water. Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir, when the
engine is cool, until the appropriate fill level is obtained.
220
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot. Steam and
scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you
badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts.
Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid
container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant could
make it difficult to see through the windshield.
• Add Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant
(yellow-colored), VC-7–A (U.S., except CA and OR), VC-7–B
(CA and OR only), meeting Ford Specification
WSS-M97B51–A1.
Note: Use of Motorcraft Cooling System Stop Leak Pellets, VC-6, may
darken the color of Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant from
yellow to golden tan.
• Do not add/mix an orange-colored, extended life coolant such
as Motorcraft Speciality Orange Engine Coolant, VC-2 (US) or
CXC-209 (Canada), meeting Ford specification WSS-M97B44–D
with the factory-filled coolant. Mixing Motorcraft Speciality Orange
Engine Coolant or any orange-colored extended life product with your
factory filled coolant can result in degraded corrosion protection.
• A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in case
of emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the
cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50/50 mixture of
engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible. Water alone
(without engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
• Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolants
mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol
and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or
freezing.
• Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These
can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine
coolant.
For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non-pressurized cap
on the coolant recovery system, add coolant to the coolant recovery
reservoir when the engine is cool. Add the proper mixture of coolant and
water to the “FULL COLD” level. For all other vehicles which have a
coolant degas system with a pressurized cap, or if it is necessary to
221
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with
an overflow system, follow these steps to add engine coolant.
To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the engine is
cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap. The
cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come out
forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly.
1. Before you begin, turn the engine off and let it cool.
2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the coolant
pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir (a translucent plastic bottle).
Slowly turn cap counterclockwise (left) until pressure begins to release.
3. Step back while the pressure releases.
4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the
cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap.
5. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture (see
above), to within the “COLD FILL RANGE” or the “FULL COLD” level on
the reservoir. If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system, fill
the radiator until the coolant is visible and radiator is almost full.
6. Replace the cap. Turn until tightly installed. (Cap must be tightly
installed to prevent coolant loss.)
After any coolant has been added, check the coolant concentration (refer
to Checking engine coolant). If the concentration is not 50/50
(protection to –34° F/–36° C), drain some coolant and adjust the
concentration. It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50/50
coolant concentration.
Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If
necessary, add enough 50/50 concentration of engine coolant and
distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level.
If you have to add more than 1.0 quart (1.0 liter) of engine coolant per
month, have your dealer check the engine cooling system. Your cooling
system may have a leak. Operating an engine with a low level of coolant
can result in engine overheating and possible engine damage.
Recycled engine coolant
Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine
coolant in vehicles originally equipped with Motorcraft Premium Gold
Engine Coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet
available.
222
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate
manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling
and disposing of automotive fluids.
Coolant refill capacity
To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can hold, refer
to Refill capacities in this section.
Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant
in this section.
Severe climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than –34° F [–36° C ]):
• It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration
above 50%.
• NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.
• Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60% will
decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the
winter months.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration
above 40%.
• NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%.
• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
protection at the temperatures in which you drive.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 50/50
mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system
and engine protection.
223
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
What you should know about fail-safe cooling
If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle to
be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred.
The “fail-safe” distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load
and terrain.
How fail-safe cooling works
• Standard cluster
H
TEMP
C
• Optional cluster
H
N
O
R
M
C
If the engine begins to overheat:
• The engine coolant temperature gauge will move to the H (hot) area
(if your vehicle is equipped with analog gauges).
• The engine coolant temperature gauge will illuminate all eight bars
and a tone will sound every five seconds for one minute (if your
vehicle is equipped with digital gauges).
• The Check Engine indicator light will illuminate.
If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine
will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled
cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. However:
• The engine power will be limited.
224
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
• The air conditioning system will be disabled.
Continued operation will increase the engine temperature:
• If your vehicle is equipped with digital gauges, the gauge bars will
flash and a tone will sound every five seconds for one minute.
• The engine will completely shut down, causing steering and braking
effort to increase.
Once the engine temperature cools, the engine can be re-started. Take
your vehicle to a service facility as soon as possible to minimize engine
damage.
When fail-safe mode is activated
You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive the
vehicle with caution. The vehicle will not be able to maintain high-speed
operation and the engine will run rough. Remember that the engine is
capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine
damage, therefore:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine.
2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to a service facility.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and replenish if low.
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is
running or hot.
5. Re-start the engine and take your vehicle to a service facility.
Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem
increases the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to a
service facility as soon as possible.
WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS
Important safety precautions
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank
may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.
The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is
venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops
before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out and injure you or others.
225
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive pressure or
vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause
the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible
personal injury.
Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or
mishandled.
Gasoline may contain benzene, which is a cancer-causing agent.
Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:
• Extinguish all smoking materials
and any open flames before
fueling your vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before
fueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful
or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if
swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,
call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are immediately
apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and
seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could
lead to permanent injury.
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is
splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or
prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of
disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors,
or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive
individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is
226
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and
water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse
reaction.
When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow
sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never smoke while
refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions.
Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes.
The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static
electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an
ungrounded fuel container.
Use the following guidelines to avoid static build-up when filling an
ungrounded fuel container:
• Place approved fuel container on the ground.
• DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the
cargo area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while
filling.
• DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill
position.
Fuel Filler Cap
Your fuel tank filler cap has an indexed design with a 1/4 turn on/off
feature.
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise 1/4 of a turn until it
stops.
3. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe.
4. To install the cap, align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the
filler pipe.
5. Turn the filler cap clockwise 1/4 of a turn until it stops.
If the “Check Fuel Cap” indicator comes on and stays on after you start
the engine, the fuel filler cap may not be properly installed. Turn off the
engine, remove the fuel filler cap, align the cap properly and reinstall it.
227
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
If you must replace the fuel filler cap, replace it with a fuel filler
cap that is designed for your vehicle. The customer warranty may
be void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the
correct genuine Ford or Motorcraft fuel filler cap is not used.
The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is
venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops
before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out and injure you or others.
If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive pressure or
vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause
the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible
personal injury.
Choosing the right fuel
Use only UNLEADED FUEL. The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law
and could damage your vehicle.
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic
compounds, including manganese-based additives. Studies indicate that
these additives can cause your vehicle’s emission control system to
deteriorate more rapidly. In Canada, premium grade fuel generally
contains more metallic additives than regular fuel. We recommend using
regular grade fuel. In Canada, many fuels contain metallic additives, but
fuels free of such additives may be available; check with your local fuel
dealer.
Do not use fuel containing methanol. It can damage critical fuel system
components.
Repairs to correct the effects of using a fuel for which your vehicle was
not designed may not be covered by your warranty.
Octane recommendations
Your vehicle is designed to use
“Regular” unleaded gasoline with
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
87
We do not recommend the use of
(R+M)/2 METHOD
gasolines labeled as “Regular” that
are sold with octane ratings of 86 or lower in high altitude areas.
Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if
it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel
228
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
with the recommended octane rating, see your dealer or a qualified
service technician to prevent any engine damage.
Fuel quality
If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation driveability
problems, try a different brand of unleaded gasoline. “Premium”
unleaded gasoline is not recommended for vehicles designed to use
“Regular” unleaded gasoline because it may cause these problems to
become more pronounced. If the problems persist, see your dealer or a
qualified service technician.
It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel
tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane
rating. Aftermarket products could cause damage to the fuel system.
Repairs to correct the effects of using an aftermarket product in your
fuel may not be covered by your warranty.
Many of the world’s automakers approved the World-wide Fuel Charter
that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved
performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle.
Gasolines that meet the World-wide Fuel Charter should be used when
available. Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the
World-wide Fuel Charter.
Cleaner air
Ford endorses the use of reformulated “cleaner-burning” gasolines to
improve air quality.
Running out of fuel
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse
affect on powertrain components.
If you have run out of fuel:
• You may need to cycle the ignition from OFF to ON several times after
refueling, to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to
the engine.
• Your “Check Engine” indicator may come on. For more information on
the “Check Engine” indicator, refer to the Instrument Cluster
chapter.
Fuel Filter
For fuel filter replacement, see your dealer or a qualified service
technician. Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the appropriate
intervals for changing the fuel filter.
229
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Replace the fuel filter with an authorized Motorcraft part. The
customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel system
if an authorized Motorcraft fuel filter is not used.
ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY
Measuring techniques
Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, the
driver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently as
possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fill-ups or fuel gauge readings are
NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommend
taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1,000 miles (1,600
km) of driving (engine break-in period). You will get a more accurate
measurement after 2,000 miles-3,000 miles (3,000 km–5,000 km).
Filling the tank
The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to
the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Refill capacities
section of this chapter.
The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the
empty reserve combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the
amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates
empty. Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.
The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should
not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your
vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be
able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the
fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank.
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:
• Turn the engine/ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling,
an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running.
• Use the same filling rate setting (low — medium — high) each time
the tank is filled.
• Allow no more than 2 automatic click-offs when filling.
• Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating.
• Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a national brand.
• Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the
same direction each time you fill up.
230
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
• Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time.
Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent.
Calculating fuel economy
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading
(in miles or kilometers).
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added (in
gallons or liters).
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record
the current odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer
reading.
5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel
economy:
Calculation 1: Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used.
Calculation 2: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total
kilometers traveled.
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city
or highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records
during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel
economy. In general, lower temperatures give lower fuel economy.
Driving style — good driving and fuel economy habits
Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change
a number of variables and improve your fuel economy.
Habits
• Smooth, moderate operation can yield up to 10% savings in fuel.
• Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel
economy.
• Idling for long periods of time (greater than one minute) may waste
fuel.
• Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.
• Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy.
• Slow down gradually.
• Driving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15%
less fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]).
231
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
• Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy.
• Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy.
• You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if
unnecessary shifting between third and fourth gear occurs.
Unnecessary shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel
economy.
• Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may
reduce fuel economy.
• Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel
economy.
• Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving.
Maintenance
• Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size.
• Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel
economy.
• Use recommended engine oil. Refer to Lubricant specifications in
this chapter.
• Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items. Follow the
recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks
found in your vehicle scheduled maintenance guide.
Conditions
• Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy
at any speed.
• Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (approximately
1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for every 400 lb [180 kg] of weight carried).
• Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example bug
deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski/luggage racks) may
reduce fuel economy.
• Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy.
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first
8–10 miles (12–16 km) of driving.
• Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to
driving on hilly terrain.
• Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top
cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal.
232
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
• Close windows for high speed driving.
EPA window sticker
Every new vehicle should have the EPA window sticker. Contact your
dealer if the window sticker is not supplied with your vehicle. The EPA
window sticker should be your guide for the fuel economy comparisons
with other vehicles.
It is important to note the box in the lower left corner of the window
sticker. These numbers represent the Range of MPG (L/100 km)
expected on the vehicle under optimum conditions. Your fuel economy
may vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a
catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with
applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic
converter and other emission control components continue to work
properly:
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at
high speeds.
• Have the items listed in your Scheduled Maintenance Guide
performed according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in the Scheduled Maintenance
Guide are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its
emissions system.
If other than Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts are used for
maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting
emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability.
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
Illumination of the “Check Engine” light, charging system warning light
or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke or
loss of engine power, could indicate that the emission control system is
not working properly.
233
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially
lethal fumes into the passenger compartment.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By
law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services,
sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not
permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent
it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on
the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the
engine. This decal identifies engine displacement and gives some tune up
specifications.
Please consult your Warranty Guide for complete emission warranty
information.
On board diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine’s
emission control system. This system is commonly known as the On
Board Diagnostics System (OBD-II). This OBD-II system protects the
environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet
government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists the
service technician in properly servicing your vehicle. When the Check
engine/Service engine soon light illuminates, the OBD-II system has
detected a malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may cause your Check
engine/Service engine soon light to illuminate. Examples are:
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel. (The engine may misfire or run
poorly.)
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel.
3. The fuel cap may not have been securely tightened.
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank
with good quality fuel and/or properly tightening the fuel cap. After three
driving cycles without these or any other temporary malfunctions
present, the Check engine/Service engine soon light should turn off. (A
driving cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed
city/highway driving.) No additional vehicle service is required.
If the Check engine/Service engine soon light remains on, have your
vehicle serviced at the first available opportunity.
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an I/M test of
the on-board diagnostics system. If your Check engine/Service engine
234
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
soon light is on, refer to the description in the Warning lights and
chimes section of the Instrument Cluster chapter. Your vehicle may not
pass the I/M test with the Check engine/Service engine soon light on.
If the vehicle’s powertrain system or its battery has just been serviced,
the on-board diagnostics system is reset to a “not ready for I/M test”
condition. To ready the on-board diagnostics system for I/M testing, a
minimum of 30 minutes of city and highway driving is necessary as
described below:
• First, at least 10 minutes of driving on an expressway or highway.
• Next, at least 20 minutes driving in stop-and-go, city-type traffic with
at least four idle periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the
engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The
engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started,
do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete.
CHECKING AND ADDING POWER STEERING FLUID
Check the power steering fluid.
Refer to the scheduled maintenance
guide for the service interval
schedules. If adding fluid is
necessary, use only MERCON
ATF.
1. Start the engine and let it run until it reaches normal operating
temperature (the engine coolant temperature gauge indicator will be
near the center of the normal area between H and C).
2. While the engine idles, turn the steering wheel left and right several
times.
3. Turn the engine off.
235
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
4. Check the fluid level in the
reservoir. It should be between the
MIN and MAX lines. Do not add
fluid if the level is in this range.
R
5. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking
the level until it reaches the range between the MIN and MAX lines. Be
sure to put the cap back on the reservoir.
BRAKE FLUID RESERVOIR
The fluid level will drop slowly as
the brakes wear, and will rise when
the brake components are replaced.
Fluid levels below the “MAX” line
that do not trigger the brake system
warning lamp are within the normal
operating range, there is no need to
add fluid. If the fluid levels are outside of the normal operating range,
the performance of your brake system could be compromised, seek
service from your dealer immediately.
TRANSMISSION FLUID
Checking automatic transmission fluid (if equipped)
Refer to your Scheduled Maintenance Guide for scheduled intervals for
fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does not consume fluid.
However, the fluid level should be checked if the transmission is not
working properly, i.e., if the transmission slips or shifts slowly or if you
notice some sign of fluid leakage.
Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an
accurate fluid check, drive the vehicle until it is at normal operating
temperature (approximately 30 km [20 miles]). If your vehicle has been
operated for an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic during hot
weather or pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be turned off for about 30
minutes to allow fluid to cool before checking.
1. Drive the vehicle 30 km (20 miles) or until it reaches normal operating
temperature.
236
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake.
3. With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal,
start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear
ranges. Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage.
4. Latch the gearshift lever in P (Park) and leave the engine running.
5. Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean with a clean, dry lint free rag. If
necessary, refer to Identifying components in the engine compartment
in this chapter for the location of the dipstick.
6. Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube.
7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level. The fluid should be in
the designated area for normal operating temperature or ambient
temperature.
Low fluid level
Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid
level is at the bottom of the dipstick
and the ambient temperature is
above 10°C (50°F).
DON’T ADD
Correct fluid level
The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating
temperature 66°C-77°C (150°F-170°F) on a level surface. The normal
operating temperature can be reached after approximately 30 km (20
miles) of driving.
You can check the fluid without driving if the ambient temperature is
above 10°C (50°F). However, if fluid is added at this time, an overfill
condition could result when the vehicle reaches normal operating
temperature.
The transmission fluid should be in
this range if at normal operating
temperature (66°C-77°C
[150°F-170°F]).
DON’T ADD
237
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
The transmission fluid should be in
this range if at ambient temperature
(10°C-35°C [50°F-95°F]).
DON’T ADD
High fluid level
Fluid levels above the safe range
may result in transmission failure.
An overfill condition of transmission
fluid may cause shift and/or
engagement concerns and/or
possible damage.
DON’T ADD
High fluid levels can be caused by
an overheating condition.
Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels
Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. The type of
fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick and also in the
Lubricant specifications section in this chapter.
Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid may cause
internal transmission component damage.
If necessary, add fluid in 250 ml (1/2 pint) increments through the filler
tube until the level is correct.
If an overfill occurs, excess fluid
should be removed by a qualified
technician.
DON’T ADD
An overfill condition of
transmission fluid may cause
shift and/or engagement
concerns and/or possible
damage.
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or
cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission
operation and result in damage to internal transmission components.
238
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
AIR FILTER MAINTENANCE
Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the appropriate intervals
for changing the air filter element.
When changing the air filter element, use only the Motorcraft air filter
element listed. Refer to Motorcraft part numbers in this chapter.
Note: Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not
remove it while the engine is running.
Changing the air filter element
1. Release the clamps that secure the air filter housing cover.
2. Carefully separate the two halves of the air filter housing.
3. Remove the air filter element from the air filter housing.
4. Wipe the air filter housing and cover clean to remove any dirt or
debris and to ensure good sealing.
5. Install a new air filter element. Be
careful not to crimp the filter
element edges between the air filter
housing and cover. This could cause
filter damage and allow unfiltered
air to enter the engine if not
properly seated.
6. Replace the air filter housing cover and secure the clamps.
7. Replace the air inlet tube and secure the clamp.
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe
engine damage. The customer warranty may be voided for any damage to
the engine if the correct air filter element is not used.
239
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS
Component
Air filter element
Fuel filter
4.6L SOHC V8 engine
FA-1668
FG-986B
Battery-standard
Battery-heavy duty
Oil filter
PCV valve
Spark plugs
BXT-65–650
BXT-65–750
FL-820-S
1
2
1The PCV valve is a critical emission component. It is one of the items
listed in the Scheduled Maintenance Guide and is essential to the life
and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system.
For PCV valve replacement, see your dealer or a qualified service
technician. Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide for the
appropriate intervals for changing the PCV valve.
Replace the PCV valve with one that meets Ford material and
design specifications for your vehicle, such as a Motorcraft or
equivalent replacement part. The customer warranty may be void
for any damage to the emissions system if such a PCV valve is not
used.
2For spark plug replacement, see your dealer or a qualified service
technician. Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide for the
appropriate intervals for changing the spark plugs.
Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and
design specifications for your vehicle, such as Motorcraft or
equivalent replacement parts. The customer warranty may be
void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not
used.
240
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
REFILL CAPACITIES
Fluid
Ford Part Name
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
Premium Synthetic
Blend Motor Oil (US)
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
Super Premium Motor
Oil (Canada)
Capacity
Engine oil (includes
filter change)6
5.7L (6.0 quarts)
Brake fluid
Motorcraft High
Performance DOT 3
Motor Vehicle Brake
Fluid1
Fill to line on reservoir
Fill to line on reservoir
Power steering fluid
Motorcraft MERCON
ATF
Transmission fluid
(4R70/75 E)2
Engine coolant
Motorcraft
3
13.2L (13.9 quarts)
MERCONV ATF
Motorcraft Premium
Gold Engine Coolant
(yellow-colored)
N/A
4
17.6L (18.6 quarts)
71.9L (19.0 gallons)
Fuel tank
Rear axle lubricant
5
Motorcraft SAE
80W-90 Premium Rear 2.4L (5.0 pints)
Axle Lubricant
Windshield washer
fluid
Motorcraft Premium
Windshield Washer
Concentrate
Fill to line on reservoir
1Use only brake fluids certified to meet Ford specifications. Refer to
Lubricant Specifications in this chapter. DOT 3 fluid is recommended.
However, if DOT 3 is not available, DOT 4 fluid can be used.
2Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used. MERCON and
MERCON V are not interchangeable. DO NOT MIX MERCON and
MERCON V. Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide to determine
the correct service interval.
241
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
3Indicates only approximate dry-fill capacity. Some applications may vary
based on cooler size and if equipped with an in-tank cooler. The amount
of transmission fluid and fluid level should be set by the indication on
the dipstick’s normal operating range. Police or Handling Package refill
capacity-12.1L (12.8 quarts).
4Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.
5Rear axles are considered lubricated for life when the vehicle is used for
normal service. See your Scheduled Maintenance Guide for Severe
Duty requirements.
Traction-Lok axles use 2.1-2.3L (4.50-4.75 pints) of rear axle lubricant.
Add 118 ml (4 oz.) of Additive Friction Modifier XL-3 or equivalent
meeting Ford specification EST-M2C118–A for complete refill of
Traction-Lok rear axle.
Service refill capacities are determined by filling the rear axle 6 mm to
14 mm (1/4 inch to 9/16 inch) below the bottom of the filler hole.
6Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine
oil need only meet the requirements of Ford specification
WSS-M2C930-A and the API Certification mark.
LUBRICANT SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Ford part
name
Motorcraft High PM-1
Performance
Ford part
number
Ford
specification
ESA-M6C25-A
and DOT 3
Brake fluid
DOT 3 Motor
Vehicle Brake
1
Fluid
Door
Silicone
XL-6
ESR-M13P4-A
weatherstrips
Lubricant
Engine coolant
Motorcraft
Premium Gold
VC-7-A (U.S.,
except CA and
WSS-
M97B51–A1
Engine Coolant OR), VC-7-B
(yellow-colored) (CA and OR
only)
242
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Item
Ford part
name
Motorcraft SAE XO-5W20-QSP
5W-20 Premium (US)
Ford part
number
Ford
specification
WSS-M2C930-A
with API
Engine oil
Synthetic Blend CXO-5W20–LSP12 Certification
Motor Oil (US)
Motorcraft SAE
5W-20 Super
(Canada)
Mark
Premium Motor
Oil (Canada)
Hinges, latches, Multi-Purpose
XG-4 or XL-5
ESB-M1C93-B
striker plates,
fuel filler door
hinge and seat
tracks
Grease
Lock cylinders
Penetrating and Motorcraft XL-1 none
Lock Lubricant
Power steering Motorcraft
XT-2-QDX
MERCON
fluid
MERCON ATF
Automatic
transmission
Motorcraft
MERCONV
XT-5-QM
MERCONV
(4R70/75 E-W) ATF3
Rear Axle
Lubricant
Motorcraft SAE XY-80W90-QL
80W-90
WSP-M2C197-A
2
Premium Rear
Axle Lubricant
Windshield
washer fluid
Motorcraft
Premuim
ZC-32-A
WSB-M8B16–A2
Windshield
Washer
Concentrate
1Use only brake fluids certified to meet Ford specifications. DOT 3 fluid
is recommended. However, if DOT 3 is not available, DOT 4 fluid can be
used.
243
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
2Add 118 ml (4 oz.) of Additive Friction Modifier XL-3 or equivalent
meeting Ford specification EST-M2C118-A for complete refill of
Traction-Lok rear axles.
3Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used. Transmission
fluid requirements are indicated on the dipstick or on the dipstick
handle. MERCON and MERCON V are not interchangeable. DO NOT
mix MERCON and MERCON V. Refer to your Scheduled Maintenance
Guide to determine the correct service interval.
ENGINE DATA
Engine
4.6L V8 engine
Cubic inches
Required fuel
Firing order
Ignition system
Spark plug gap
Compression ratio
281
87 octane
1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8
Coil on plug
0.052–0.056 inch (1.32–1.42mm)
9.4:1
VEHICLE DIMENSIONS (AT CURB MASS)
Vehicle dimensions
(1) Overall length
(2) Overall width
(3) Overall height
(4) Wheelbase
Inches (mm)
213.1 (5413)/219.1 (5566)a
78.3 (1990)
58.3 (1481)/58.9 (1495)a
114.6 (2911)/120.7 (3067)a
63.4 (1610)
(5) Track - Front
(5) Track - Rear
65.6 (1666)
a
Denotes long wheel base
244
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
4
1
245
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE
Certification label
The National Highway Traffic Safety
MFD. BY FORD MOTOR CO. IN U.S.A.
Administration Regulations require
that a Certification label be affixed
to a vehicle and prescribe where the
Certification label may be located.
The Certification label is located on
the structure by the trailing edge of
the driver’s door or the edge of the
driver’s door.
DATE: XXXXX
GVWR:XXXXXXXXXXXX
FRONT GAWR: XXXXXX/XXXXXXX
REAR GAWR: XXXXXXX/XXXXXXX
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL
MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY, BUMPER, AND THEFT PRE-
VENTION STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF
MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE.
VIN: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
TYPE: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
EXT PNT: XXXXXX XXXXXX
RC: XX
DSO: XXXX
BAR INT TR TP/PS
R
AXLE TR SPR
X
XX
XXX
X
XX
X
UPC
XXXX
∇F85B-1520472-AB
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
The vehicle identification number is
attached to a metal tag and is
located on the driver side
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
instrument panel. (Please note that
in the graphic XXXX is
representative of your vehicle
identification number.)
1. World manufacturer identifier
2. Brake type and gross vehicle
weight rating (GVWR)
3. Vehicle line, series, body type
4. Engine type
5. Check digit
6. Model year
7. Assembly plant
8. Production sequence number
246
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Engine number
The engine number (the last eight numbers of the vehicle identification
number) is stamped on the engine block, transmission, frame and
transfer case (if equipped).
247
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories
Accessories
GENUINE FORD ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE
A wide selection of Genuine Ford Accessories are available for your
vehicle through your local authorized Ford or Ford of Canada dealer.
These quality accessories have been specifically engineered to fulfill your
automotive needs; they are custom designed to complement the style
and aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle. In addition, each accessory
is made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Ford’s rigorous
engineering and safety specifications. Ford Motor Company will repair or
replace any properly dealer-installed Genuine Ford Accessory found to
be defective in factory-supplied materials or workmanship during the
warranty period, as well as any component damaged by the defective
accessory. The accessory will be warranted for whichever provides you
the greatest benefit:
• 12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000 km) (whichever occurs first), or
• the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty.
This means that Genuine Ford Accessories purchased along with your
new vehicle and installed by the dealer are covered for the full length of
your New Vehicle’s Limited Warranty — 3 years or 36,000 miles (60,000
km) (whichever occurs first). Contact your dealer for details and a copy
of the warranty.
Not all accessories are available for all models.
The following is a list of several Genuine Ford Accessory products for
your vehicle. Not all accessories are available for all models. For a
complete listing of the accessories that are available for your vehicle,
please contact your dealer or visit our online store at:
www.fordaccessoriesstore.com.
Exterior style
Bug shields
Deflectors
Front end covers
Headlamps, fog lights and Daytime Running Lamps (DRLs)
Splash guards
Interior style
Electrochromatic compass/temperature interior mirrors
Floor mats
Lifestyle
Bike racks
Cargo organization and management
248
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories
Peace of mind
First aid and safety kits
Full vehicle covers
Locking gas cap
Remote start
Vehicle security systems
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in
mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of
the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety
Compliance Certification label). Consult your dealer for specific weight
information.
• The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile
communications systems — such as two-way radios, telephones and
theft alarms - that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such
equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC
regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service
technician.
• Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your
vehicle, particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive
use.
• To avoid interference with other vehicle functions, such as anti-lock
braking systems, amateur radio users who install radios and antennas
onto their vehicle should not locate the Amateur Radio Antennas in
the area of the driver’s side hood.
• Electrical or electronic accessories or components that are
non-Genuine Ford Accessories added to the vehicle by the dealer or
the owner may adversely affect battery performance and durability.
249
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Index
A
acid, treating emergencies .....217
jumping a disabled battery ....189
maintenance-free ....................217
replacement, specifications ...240
servicing ..................................217
ABS (see Brakes) .....................164
Air bag supplemental restraint
system ........................109–110, 117
and child safety seats ............112
description ......................110, 117
disposal ....................................119
driver air bag ..................112, 118
indicator light .................117, 119
operation .........................112, 118
passenger air bag ...........112, 118
side air bag ..............................117
BeltMinder .................................104
Brakes ........................................164
anti-lock ...........................164–165
anti-lock brake system (ABS)
warning light ...........................165
fluid, checking and adding ....236
fluid, refill capacities ..............241
fluid, specifications .........242, 244
lubricant specifications ..242, 244
shift interlock ..................170–171
Air cleaner filter ...............239–240
Air conditioning ..........................36
Air suspension ...........................169
description ..............................169
Bulbs ............................................43
Antifreeze
(see Engine coolant) ................219
C
Capacities for refilling fluids ....241
CD changer .................................31
Cell phone use ............................75
Certification Label ....................246
Changing a tire .........................136
Anti-lock brake system
(see Brakes) ......................164–165
Audio system
(see Radio) ................20, 24, 27, 29
Automatic transmission
driving an automatic
overdrive .................................172
fluid, adding ............................236
fluid, checking ........................236
fluid, refill capacities ..............241
fluid, specification ..................244
Child safety restraints ..............120
child safety belts ....................120
Child safety seats ......................123
attaching with tether straps ..127
in front seat ............................124
in rear seat ..............................124
Auxiliary power point .................60
Cleaning your vehicle
Axle
engine compartment ..............205
instrument panel ....................207
interior .....................................207
interior trim ............................207
plastic parts ............................206
washing ....................................204
waxing .....................................204
lubricant specifications ..242, 244
refill capacities ........................241
traction lok ..............................175
B
Battery .......................................217
250
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
wheels ......................................205
wiper blades ............................206
Utilizing the
Mediation/Arbitration
Program ...................................201
Climate control (see Air
conditioning or Heating) ............36
D
Clock adjust
AM/FM .......................................28
AM/FM/CD .................................24
AM/FM/Tape ..............................29
AM/FM/Tape/CD .......................22
Daytime running lamps
(see Lamps) ................................39
Defrost
rear window ..............................38
Compass, electronic
set zone adjustment .................52
Dipstick
automatic transmission
fluid ..........................................236
engine oil .................................213
Console ........................................76
overhead ..............................50, 52
Controls
Doors
power seat .................................93
steering column ........................66
lubricant specifications ..........242
Driving under special
conditions ..................................175
through water .........................176
Coolant
checking and adding ..............219
refill capacities ................223, 241
specifications ..................242, 244
E
Cruise control
(see Speed control) ....................63
Electronic message center .........71
Cupholder(s) ...............................95
Emergencies, roadside
jump-starting ..........................189
Customer Assistance ................177
Ford accessories for your
vehicle .....................................208
Ford Extended Service
Plan ..........................................201
Getting assistance outside
the U.S. and Canada ..............202
Getting roadside assistance ...177
Getting the service you
Emission control system ..........233
Engine ........................................244
cleaning ...................................205
coolant .....................................219
fail-safe coolant ......................224
idle speed control ...................217
lubrication
specifications ..................242, 244
refill capacities ........................241
service points ..........................212
starting after a collision .........178
need .........................................195
Ordering additional owner’s
literature .................................203
The Dispute Settlement
Engine block heater .................163
Board .......................................198
251
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Engine oil ..................................213
change oil soon warning,
G
message center .......................213
checking and adding ..............213
dipstick ....................................213
Garage Door Opener
(see Homelink wireless control
system) ........................................67
filter, specifications
recommendations
........216, 240
...................216
Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ............227
Gas mileage
(see Fuel economy) .................230
refill capacities
specifications
........................241
..................242, 244
Gauges .........................................15
Exhaust fumes
..........................163
H
F
Hazard flashers .........................178
Head restraints ...........................90
Fail safe cooling
........................224
Floor mats
...................................76
Headlamps ...................................39
aiming ........................................41
autolamp system .......................39
bulb specifications ....................43
daytime running lights .............39
flash to pass ..............................40
high beam .................................40
replacing bulbs .........................44
turning on and off ....................39
Fluid capacities
.........................241
Fuel
............................................225
calculating fuel
economy
............................54, 230
cap
...........................................227
capacity
...................................241
choosing the right fuel
...........228
comparisons with EPA fuel
Heating
economy estimates
detergent in fuel
.................233
.....................229
heating and air conditioning
system .................................35–36
filling your vehicle with
Homelink wireless control
system ..........................................67
fuel
...........................225, 227, 230
filter, specifications
........229, 240
Hood ..........................................211
fuel pump shut-off switch
improving fuel economy
.....178
........230
I
octane rating
...................228, 244
......................................229
quality
Ignition ...............................160, 244
running out of fuel
.................229
safety information relating to
Infant seats
(see Safety seats) .....................123
automotive fuels
.....................225
Inspection/maintenance (I/M)
testing ........................................234
Fuses
..................................179–180
252
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Instrument panel
Locks
cleaning ...................................207
cluster ........................................10
lighting up panel and
autolock .....................................84
childproof ..................................78
doors ..........................................77
interior .......................................40
Lubricant specifications ...242, 244
Lug nuts ....................................142
Lumbar support, seats ...............92
J
Jack ............................................136
positioning ...............................136
storage .....................................136
M
Jump-starting your vehicle ......189
Message center ...........................71
reset button ..............................72
select button .............................72
K
Mirrors .........................................50
automatic dimming rearview
mirror ........................................62
fold away ...................................62
heated ........................................62
side view mirrors (power) .......61
Keyless entry system .................85
autolock .....................................84
keypad .......................................85
programming entry code .........85
Keys .......................................77, 88
positions of the ignition .........160
Moon roof ....................................67
Motorcraft parts ................229, 240
L
Lamps
O
autolamp system .......................39
bulb replacement
Octane rating ............................228
Oil (see Engine oil) ..................213
specifications chart ..................43
daytime running light ...............39
headlamps .................................39
headlamps, flash to pass ..........40
instrument panel, dimming .....40
interior lamps ...............41–43, 48
replacing bulbs ...................43–47
P
Parking brake ............................166
Parts (see Motorcraft parts) ....240
Passenger Occupant
Classification Sensor ...................97
Lane change indicator
(see Turn signal) ........................41
Pedals (see Power adjustable
foot pedals) .................................63
Lights, warning and indicator ....10
anti-lock brakes (ABS) ..........165
Power adjustable foot pedals .....63
Limited slip axle
(see Traction Loc) ....................175
Power distribution box
(see Fuses) ...............................184
Load limits .................................152
253
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Power door locks ..................77, 84
Power mirrors .............................61
Power point .................................60
Safety seats for children ..........123
Seat belts
(see Safety restraints) ...............95
Seats ............................................90
child safety seats ....................123
front seats .................................90
Power steering ..................168–169
fluid, checking and adding ....235
fluid, refill capacity ................241
fluid, specifications .................242
SecuriLock passive anti-theft
system ..........................................88
Power Windows ...........................60
Servicing your vehicle ..............210
R
Setting the clock
AM/FM stereo ...........................28
AM/FM/CD .................................24
AM/FM/Tape ..............................29
AM/FM/Tape/CD .......................22
Radio ..........................20, 24, 27, 29
Rear window defroster ...............38
Relays ................................179, 188
Spark plugs, specifications ......240,
244
Remote entry system .................79
illuminated entry ......................83
locking/unlocking doors ...........80
opening the trunk .....................81
replacement/additional
Specification chart,
lubricants ...........................242, 244
Speed control ..............................63
transmitters ...............................82
Starting your
vehicle ........................160–161, 163
jump starting ..........................189
Roadside assistance ..................177
S
Steering
speed sensitive .......................169
Safety Belt Maintenance ..........109
Steering wheel
controls ......................................66
tilting .........................................50
Safety belts (see Safety
restraints) ......................95, 99–102
Safety defects, reporting ..........203
T
Safety restraints ............95, 99–102
belt minder .............................104
extension assembly ................108
for adults .........................100–102
for children .............................120
lap belt ....................................103
Occupant Classification
Tilt steering wheel ......................50
Tires ...........................131–132, 136
alignment ................................149
care ..........................................147
changing ..........................136, 138
checking the pressure ............134
inspecting and inflating .........133
label .........................................147
Sensor ........................................97
safety belt maintenance .........109
warning light and chime ........104
254
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
replacing ..................................136
rotating ....................................150
safety practices .......................148
sidewall information ...............142
snow tires and chains ............151
spare tire .........................136–137
terminology .............................132
tire grades ...............................132
treadwear ........................131, 147
Towing .......................................157
recreational towing .................159
trailer towing ..........................157
wrecker ....................................194
Turn signal ..................................41
V
Vehicle dimensions ...................244
Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) ..........................................246
Vehicle loading ..........................152
Ventilating your vehicle ...........163
W
Traction control ........................167
Traction-lok rear axle ...............175
Warning lights (see Lights) .......10
Washer fluid ..............................213
Water, Driving through .............176
Transmission .............................170
brake-shift interlock
(BSI) ................................170–171
fluid, checking and adding
(automatic) .............................236
fluid, refill capacities ..............241
lubricant specifications ..242, 244
Windows
power .........................................60
Windshield washer fluid and
wipers ..........................................49
checking and adding fluid .....213
replacing wiper blades .............49
Trunk ...........................................78
remote release ....................75, 81
Wrecker towing .........................194
255
REVIEW COPY
2005 Crown Victoria (cro), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
256
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|